Nbsir73 333

NBSIR 73-333 (K)
TEST PROCEDURES HANDBOOK FOR

SURVEILLANCE RECEIVERS BELOW 100 MHz
M.G. Arthur
Electromagnetic Metrology
Information Center
Electromagnetics Division
Institute for Basic Standards
National Bureau of Standards
Boulder, Colorado 80302
October 1973
Prepared for:
U.S. Army Security Test and Evaluation Center
Ft. Huachuca, Arizona
,s)01-UT,o^
NBSIR 73-333
TEST PROCEDURES HANDBOOK FOR

SURVEILLANCE RECEIVERS BELOW 100 MHz
M.G. Arthur
Electromagnetic Metrology
Information Center
Electromagnetics Division
Institute for Basic Standards
National Bureau of Standards
Boulder, Colorado 80302
October 1973
Prepared for:
U.S. Army Security Test and Evaluation Center
Ft. Huachuca, Arizona
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, Frederick B. Dent, Secretary
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS, Richard W Roberts Director

1
CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES vii
LIST OF TABLES x
ABSTRACT xiii
1.0. INTRODUCTION 1
1.1. PURPOSE 1
1.2. SCOPE AND LIMITATIONS 1
1.3. SOURCES OF INFORMATION 2
2.0 SURVEILLANCE RECEIVERS 6
2.1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS 6
2.2. CRITERIA FOR TEST AND CALIBRATION 7
2.3. SPECIFICATIONS OF TYPICAL RECEIVERS 7
3.0. TEST METHODS AND PROCEDURES 11

3.1. GENERAL 11
3.2. STANDARD TEST CONDITIONS 17
3.2.1. AMBIENT CONDITIONS 17
3.2.2. PRIMARY INPUT POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE 18
3.2.3. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY CONDITIONS ... 18
3.2.4. RECEIVER PREPARATION 18
3.2.5. TEST INSTRUMENTATION PREPARATION 19
3.2.6. TERMINATIONS 19
3.2.7. TEST FREQUENCIES 20
3.2.8. SIGNAL LEVELS 20
3.2.9. MODULATION 21
3.3. MEASUREMENT ERRORS 22
3.3.1. TYPES OF ERRORS 22
3.3.2. ORIGINS OF ERRORS 22
3.3.3. ERROR EQUATION 22
3.3.4. REDUNDANCY 23
3.3.5. POOLING ERRORS 24
3.3.6. OBTAINING MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTIES 25
iii
CONTENTS (Contd.)
Paê
. 0. DETAILED TEST PROCEDURES 26
4.1. SENSITIVITY 26
4.1.1. SENSITIVITY OF A GAIN-LIMITED AM RECEIVER ... 27
4.1.2. 6 dB SN/N SENSITIVITY OF A NOISE-LIMITED AM
RECEIVER 33
4.1.3. 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY OF A NOISE-LIMITED AM
RECEIVER 40
4.1.4. QUIETING SENSITIVITY OF AN FM RECEIVER WITH
ONE OR MORE LIMITERS 47
4.1.5. 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY OF AN FM RECEIVER WITH
ONE OR MORE LIMITERS 54
4.1.6. NOISE FACTOR 61
4.2. SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO 85
4.3. GAIN 91
4.3.1. POWER GAIN 91
4.3.2. DYNAMIC RANGE 98
4.3.3. AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL 115

4.4. SELECTIVITY 135
4.4.1. SELECTANCE 136
4.4.2. CW BANDWIDTH 154
4.4.3. SHAPE FACTOR 16 4
4.4.4. MODULATION ACCEPTANCE BANDWIDTH 172
4.4.5. SPURIOUS RESPONSE ATTENUATION .... 177
4.4.6. NOISE BANDWIDTH 191
4.4.7. DESENSITIZATION 196
4.4.8. CROSS MODULATION 204
4.4.9. ADJACENT CHANNEL SELECTIVITY 212
4.4.10. INTERMODULATION DISTORTION 218
4.4.11. IMPULSE BANDWIDTH 2 50
iv
CONTENTS (Contd.)
Paê
4.5 INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY 258
4.5.1. CONDUCTED INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF A
NOISE-LIMITED AM RECEIVER 259
4.5.2. CONDUCTED INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF AN
FM RECEIVER WITH ONE OR MORE LIMITERS .... 267
4.5.3. RADIATED INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF A
NOISE-LIMITED AM RECEIVER 275
4.5.4. RADIATED INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF AN
FM RECEIVER WITH ONE OR MORE LIMITERS .... 281
4.6. EMISSION 287
4.6.1. CONDUCTED EMISSION . 2 87
4.6.2. RADIATED EMISSION 295
4.7. TIME DELAY 299
4.8. FREQUENCY STABILITY 309
4.9. FREQUENCY READOUT ERROR 316
4.10. IMPEDANCE 321
4.11. STANDING WAVE RATIO 330
4.12. DETECTORS 336
4.13. AUDIO SECTION 337
4.13.1. AUDIO GAIN 337
4.13.2. AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE 3 42
4.13.3. AUDIO LINEARITY 363
4.13.4. AUDIO DISTORTION 369
4.13.5. HUM AND NOISE 374
4.13.6. NOISE LIMITER THRESHOLD 378
4.13.7. SQUELCH SENSITIVITY 384
4.14. POWER SUPPLY SECTION 39 0
4.14.1. INPUT POWER 390
4.14.. 2. OUTPUT VOLTAGE 398
4.14.3. VOLTAGE REGULATION 401
4.14.4. RIPPLE AND NOISE 415
V
CONTENTS (Contd.)
^ Page
5.0. TEST EQUIPMENT 419
5.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..... 419
5.2. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 419
5.2.1. RF SIGNAL GENERATORS 420
5.2.2. VOLTMETERS 420
5.2.3. IMPEDANCE METERS 421
5.2.4. IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORKS 421
5.2.5. ISOLATION NETWORKS 422
5.2.6. COMBINING NETWORKS 422
5.2.7. INSERTION NETWORKS 423
5.2.8. LINE IMPEDANCE NETWORKS 423
5.3. INVENTORY REQUIREMENTS 425
5.3.1. EQUIPMENT IN USASATEC INVENTORY 42 5
5.3.2. EQUIPMENT NOT IN USASATEC INVENTORY 425
5.4. CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS 433
5.4.1. CALIBRATION SCHEDULE 433
5.4.2. CALIBRATION INFORMATION 4 34
6.0 RECOMMENDATIONS 435
6.1. VERIFICATION OF PROCEDURES 4 35
6.2. PARAMETERS NOT COVERED 435
6.3. IMPROVED PROCEDURES 4 36
7.0 BIBLIOGRAPHY 438
vi
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
4.1.1. Test Set-Up for Gain Limited Sensitivity .... 28
4.1.2. Test Set-Up for 6 dB SN/N Sensitivity 34
4.1.3. Test Set-Up for 12 dB SN/N Sensitivity (AM). . . 42
4.1.4. Test Set-Up for Quieting Sensitivity 48
4.1.5. Test Set-Up for 12 dB SINAD Sensitivity (FM) . . 56
4.1.6.1. Test Set-Up for Noise Factor, ANFM Method ... 63
4.1.6.2. Test Set-Up for Noise Factor, Y-Factor/Power

Meter Method 68
4.1.6.3. Test Set-Up for Noise Factor, Y-Factor/Attenuator

Method 74
4.1.6.4. Test Set-Up for Noise Factor, 3 dB Method ... 81
4.2. Test Set-Up for Signal- to-Noise Ratio 86
4.3.1. Test Set-Up for Power Gain 92
4.3.2.1. Test Set-Up for Dynamic Range, MGC 99
4.3.2.2. Test Set-Up for Dynamic Range, AGC 109
4.3.3.1. Test Set-Up for Automatic Gain Control; Gain

vs. AGC Voltage 117
4.3.3.2. Test Set-Up for Automatic Gain Control; Leveling

Effect 123
4.3.3.3. Test Set-Up for Automatic Gain Control; Time

Constants 130
4.4.1.1. Test Set-Up for Selectance, Point-by-Point

Method I 13 8
4.4.1.2. Test Set-Up for Selectance, Point-by-Point

Method II 144
4.4.1.3. Test Set-Up for Selectance, Swept Frequency

Method 149
4.4.2.1. Test Set-Up for Bandwidth, Generator Method . . 155
vii
List of Figures (Contd.)
Figure Page
4.4.2.2. Test Set-Up for Bandwidth, Swept-Frequency

Method 162
4.4.3. Test Set-Up for Shape Factor 165
4.4.4. Test Set-Up for Modulation Acceptance Bandwidth 173
4.4.5.1. Test Set-Up for Spurious Response Attenu-

ation (AM) 180
4.4.5.2. Test Set-Up for Spurious Response Attenu-

ation (FM) 185
4.4.6. Test Set-Up for Noise Bandwidth 192
4.4.7. Test Set-Up for Desensitization 197
4.4.8. Test Set-Up for Cross Modulation 205
4.4.9. Test Set-Up for Adjacent Channel Selectivity . . 214
4.4.10.1. Test Set-Up for Intermodulation Distortion,

Method I 220

Method II 227

Method III 236

Method IV 244
4.4.11.1. Test Set-Up for Impulse Bandwidths 252
4.4.11.2. Impulse Response Pattern 255
4.5.1. Test Set-Up for Conducted Interference

Susceptibility (AM) 261
4.5.2. Test Set-Up for Conducted Interference

Susceptibility (FM) 268
4.5.3. Test Set-Up for Radiated Interference

Susceptibility (AM) 277
4.5.4. Test Set-Up for Radiated Interference

Susceptibility (FM) 283
viii
List of Figures (Contd.)
Figure Page
4.6.1. Test Set-Up for Conducted Emission 290
4.6.2. Test Set-Up for Radiated Emission 297
4.7. Test Set-Up for Time Delay 300
4.8. Test Set-Up for Frequency Stability 311
4.9. Test Set-Up for Frequency Readout Error 317
4.10.1. Test Set-Up for Impedance, Method I 323
4.10.2. Test Set-Up for Impedance, Method II 327
4.11. Test Set-Up for Standing Wave Ratio 332
4.13.1. Test Set-Up for Audio Gain 338
4.13.2.1. Test Set-Up for Audio Frequency Response, Point-

by-Point Method I 343
4.13.2.2. Test Set-Up for Audio Frequency Response, Point-

by-Point Method II 349
4.13.2.3. Test Set-Up for Audio Frequency Response, Swept

Frequency Method 354
4.13.2.4. Test Set-Up for Audio Frequency Response,

RF Method 357
4.13.3. Test Set-Up for Audio Linearity 364
4.13.4. Test Set-Up for Audio Distortion 371
4.13.5. Test Set-Up for Audio Hum and Noise 375
4.13.6. Test Set-Up for Noise Limiter Threshold 379
4.13.7. Test Set-Up for Squelch Sensitivity 385
4.14.1. Test Set-Up for Input Power 392
4.14.2. Test Set-Up for Output Voltage 399
4.14.3.1. Test Set-Up for Voltage Regulation (Line) .... 402
4.14.3.2. Test Set-Up for Voltage Regulation (Load) .... 410
4.14.4. Test Set-Up for Ripple and Noise 416
5.2.8. Line Impedance Network 424
ix
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
I Selected Electrical Specifications of Typical

Surveillance Receivers 8
II Test Procedure Summary 13
III Sources of Documented Procedures 16
IV Gain-Limited Sensitivity Initial Control Settings 31

V 6 dB S/N Sensitivity Initial Control Settings . 37
VI 12 dB SINAD Sensitivity (AM) Initial Control

Settings 44
VII Quieting Sensitivity Initial Control Settings . 51
VIII 12 dB SINAD Sensitivity (FM) Initial Control

Settings 58
IX Noise Factor, ANFM Method Initial Control

Settings 65
X Noise Factor, Y-Factor/Power Meter Method

Initial Control Settings 70
XI Noise Factor, Y-Factor/Attenuator Method

XII Noise Factor, 3 dB Method Initial Control

Settings 83
XIII Signal-to-Noise Ratio Initial Control Settings . 88
XIV Power Gain Initial Control Settings 94
XV Dynamic Range (MGC) Initial Control Settings . . 102
XVI Dynamic Range (AGC) Initial Control Settings . . Ill
XVII Automatic Gain Control; Gain vs. AGC Voltage

XVIII Automatic Gain Control; Leveling Effect

XIX Automatic Gain Control; Time Constants

XX Selectance, Point-by-Point Method I Initial

Control Settings 140
X
List of Tables (Contd.)
Table Page
XXI Selectance, Swept-Frequency Method Initial

XXII CW Bandwidth, Generator Method Initial Control

Settings 158
XXIII Shape Factor Initial Control Settings 16 8
XXIV Desensitization Initial Control Settings .... 200
XXV Cross Modulation Initial Control Settings ... 209
XXVI Intermodulation Distortion, Method I Initial

XXVII Band Pass Filter Frequency, . . . 224
XXVIII Intermodulation Distortion, Methods II and III

XXIX Frequency f , of Generator No. 2 23 3
XXX Intermodulation Distortion, Method IV Initial

XXXI Impulse Bandwidth Initial Control Settings ... 254
XXXII Conducted and Radiated Interference Suscep-

tibility (AM) Initial Control Settings .... 263
XXXIII Conducted and Radiated Interference Suscep-

tibility (FM) Initial Control Settings .... 271
XXXIV Conducted Emission Initial Control Settings . .29 2

XXXV Time Delay Initial Control Settings 30 3
XXXVI Oscilloscope Control Settings 304
XXXVII Frequency Stability Initial Control Settings . . 314
XXXVIII Frequency Readout Error Initial Control Settings 319
XXXIX Impedance, Methods I and II Initial Control

Settings 324
XXXX Standing Wave Ratio Initial Control Settings . . 333
XXXXI Audio Frequency Response, RF Method Initial

— xi
List of Tables (Contd.)
Table Page
XXXXII Noise Limiter Threshold Initial Control Settings 382
XXXXIII Squelch Sensitivity Initial Control Settings . . 387
XXXXIV Input Power Initial Control Settings 395
XXXXV Voltage Regulation Initial Control Settings . . 405
XXXXVI Test Equipment Requirements 426
xii
ABSTRACT
This handbook contains test methods and procedures for

radio receivers of advanced design that operate in the
frequency range below 100 MHz. Sixty-one methods are
given for testing forty receiver characteristics such
as sensitivity, selectivity, gain, interference suscepti-
bility, audio characteristics, power supply characteristics
and others. Each receiver characteristic is defined. For
each method, the following information is given: (a) test
equipment required, (b) step by step procedure, (c) data
required, and (d) measurement error computation. The hand-
book also includes a general discussion of standard test
conditions, suitable test equipment, and measurement errors.
Key Words: Electronic measurements; electronic

test equipment; measurement errors;
radio receivers; receiver characteris-
tics; receiver testing.
. .
1.0. INTRODUCTION
Engineers and measurement specialists have provided a

variety of methods, techniques, and procedures for testing
electronic equipment, and for measuring the various performance
parameters that are critical to the proper utilization of
electronic systems. This body of knowledge is scattered in
various documents so that it is not always convenient to produce
upon demand any given procedure that may be needed. Further,
because of incompleteness, differences of purpose or outlook,
and advances in the state of the art, much of this published
measurement knowledge does not satisfy current needs in certain
technical areas
This manual is an attempt to improve upon the current

situation by collecting together those procedures that are
useful for testing and measuring the performance of surveillance
receivers
1.1. PURPOSE
The specific purpose of this manual is to up-grade the test

procedures used by the U.S. Army Security Test and Evaluation
Center at Ft. Huachuca, Arizona in its test and evaluation of
prototype surveillance receiver equipment in the frequency range
below 100 MHz.
1.2. SCOPE AND LIMITATIONS
The test and measurement procedures given are for surveillance

and similar types of communications receivers. Long-established
procedures are included only if they are still valid. New procedures,
that may not yet be widely adopted, are included when they are
superior and practicable. Requirements that are not now met by
.
known procedures are identified, and some possible solutions are

offered when known.
The procedures given in this manual are written for the

knowledgeable engineering technician who has had training
and experience in electronic measurements These are not procedures
.
that can be correctly performed by elementary-level personnel, nor

are they such as to require advanced training as may be found only
at the primary standards laboratory level.
In some cases, several procedures are given to meet a variety

of needs of accuracy, speed, convenience, or equipment inventory
limitations
1.3. SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Principal sources of information are issuances of the IEEE,

EIA, lEC, CCIR, and DoD, listed below. Other sources of
general information are listed in Section 7.0. , Bibliography.
a. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)
1. IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics

Terms, IEEE Std 100 - 1972, Wiley - Interscience , 1972.
2. IRE Standards on Receivers: Definitions of Terms,

19 52 (52 IRE 17. SI) (IEEE No. 188).
3. IRE Standards on Radio Receivers: Methods of Testing

Amplitude - Modulation Broadcast Receivers, 19 48
(48 IRE 17. SI) ( IEEE No. 186) .
4. IRE Standards on Radio Receivers: Methods of Testing

Frequency - Modulation Broadcast Receivers, 1947
(47 IRE 17. SI) (IEEE No. 185).
2
.
5. IEEE Test Procedures for Frequency-Modulated Mobile

Communications Receivers, IEEE No. 184, April 1969
(Revision of 49 IRE 26. SI).
6. IEEE Standards for Measurement of Radio Noise Generated

by Motor Vehicles and Affecting Mobile Communications
Receivers in the Frequency Range 25 to lOOO Megacycles
per Second, IEEE No. 263, November 1965.
7. IRE Standards on Audio Techniques: Definitions of

Terms, 1958 (58 IRE 3. SI).
8. IRE Standards on Audio Systems and Components: Methods

of Measurement of Gain, Amplification, Loss Attenuation,
and Amplitude-Frequency-Response, 1956 (56 IRE 3. SI).
EIA (Electronic Industries Association)
1. Minimum Standards for Land-Mobile Communication FM or

PM receivers, EIA RS-204, January 1958.
Also, Standards Proposal No. 1092, a revision of RS-204

October 1970
2. Minimum Standards for Land-Mobile Communication Systems

Using FM or PM in tne 25-470 Mc Frequency Spectrum,
EIA RS-237, August i960.
lEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
1 . Recommended Methods of Measurement on Receivers for

Amplitude-Modulation Broadcast Transmissions,
Publication 69, 1954.
.
2. Recommended Methods of Measurement on Receivers for

Frequency-Modulation Broadcast Transmissions,
Publication 91, 1958.
3. Recommended Methods of Measurement of Radiation from

Receivers for Amplitude-Modulation, Frequency-Modulation
and Television Broadcast Transmissions, Publication
106, 1959; and Publication 106A, 1962.
CCIR (International Radio Consultative Committee)
1, Noise and Sensitivity of Receivers, Recommendation

331-2, Xllth Plenary Assembly, New Delhi, 1970.
2. Selectivity of Receivers, Recommendation 332-2,

XII th Plenary Assembly, New Delhi, 19 70.
3, Bandwidths and Signal-to-Noise Ratios in Complete

Systems, Recommendation 339-2, Xllth Plenary Assembly
New Delhi, 1 9 70 .
4. Amplitude-Modulation Sound Broadcasting, Objective

Two-Signal Methods of Measurement of Radio-Frequency
Wanted-to-Interf ering Signal Ratios, Report 399-1,
Xllth Plenary Assembly, New Delhi, 1970.
DOD (Department of Defense)
1 . Measurement of Radio Frequency Spectrum Characteristics,

MIL-STD-449C, 1 March 1965.
2. Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics,

Requirements for Equipment, MIL-STD-461A
7 February 1969
3. Measurement of Electromagnetic Interference
Characteristics, MIL-STD-462, 1 August 1968.
4 . Electromagnetic Interference Test Requirements

and Test Methods, MIL-STD-826, 20 January 1964.
5. Materiel Test Procedure for Receiver-Transmitter,

General, MTP 6-2-242, 1 September 1967.
5
2.0. SURVEILLANCE RECEIVERS
- 2.1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
The modern surveillance receiver is a high-performance

HF and VHF receiver based upon the latest advances in
communications technology. Although its operational features
are similar to its predecessors, its electrical design and
construction bear little resemblance to receivers of a decade
ago. Most notable are the characteristics of all solid-state
design, modular construction, and digitally controlled
heterodyne oscillators. Excellent short- and long-term stability
is achieved through the use of automatic frequency control
referenced to a precision crystal oscillator. Digital frequency
display is common. The small power requirements of solid-state
circuits further contribute to stability as well as to compact
size and moderate weight. The availability of low-noise, linear
transistors results in improved sensitivity and exceptional
dynamic range, while at the same time reducing intermodulation
and distortion products. The small space and power requirements
of modern circuits make feasible the use of independent networks
where multipurpose networks had been used; for example, separate
detectors for CW, AM, FM, USB, LSB and AGC separate AF ampli-
, ,
fiers for line and speaker outputs, and separate BFO circuits for
CW, USB, and LSB detection.
Modern surveillance receivers are also less susceptible to

electromagnetic interference because of improved filtering,
shielding, and amplifier linearity. They are designed to work
over a wide range of ambient temperature, mechanical shock,
and primary power options.
6
2.2. CRITERIA FOR TEST AND CALIBRATION
The surveillance receiver under test must be in normal

operating condition before making any measurements of its
electrical parameters. For example, all operating discrepancies
must be corrected. All tuned circuits must be aligned and tuned
according to the manufacturer's specified procedures. Any
malfunctions must be repaired. Power supply voltages must be
within the manufacturer's prescribed tolerances.
Although these test procedures can serve to reveal

malfunctions and improper operation of the receiver, they are
not intended for this purpose. Much time may be saved if the
receiver is checked according to the maintenance procedures
provided by the manufacturer before starting these tests.
2.3. SPECIFICATIONS OF TYPICAL RECEIVERS
The electrical specifications of surveillance receivers

will vary according to the frequency range, application, and
operational requirements. Some electrical specifications of
typical receivers are listed in Table I. No single receiver will
necessarily include all of these parameters, nor will the specified
value of a given parameter always fall within the range listed.
The test procedures given in this handbook are designed to

measure these parameters within the ranges listed in Table I.
In addition, procedures for other parameters are also given.
7
TABLE I
Selected Electrical Specifications
Of Typical Surveillance Receivers
Parameter Units Range
Sensitivity Microvolts 0.1 to 3 yv
Noise Factor Decibels 3 to 15 dB
Gain Decibels 10 0 to 150 dB
Dynamic Range Decibels

With AGC 80 to 120 dB
With MGC 20 to 120 dB
Automatic Gain Control 2 to 6 dB levell

(Levelling Effect) for inputs from
1 to 100,000 yV
Automatic Gain Control Seconds

Attack time 0.001 to 0.1 sec
Decay time 0.01 to 5 sec.
Bandwidth Hertz 100 Hz to 25 kHz
Shape Factor 1.3:1 to 10 :1
8
Table I (Cont'd)
9 . Spurious Response Decibels 40 to 100 dB

Attenuation
10. Desensitization Millivolts 10 to 10 0 0 mV
11. Cross Modulation Millivolts 10 to 1000 mV
12 . Intermodulation Decibels 30 to 100 dB

Distortion
13. Conducted Interference Millivolts 1 to 10 00 mV

Susceptibility
14. Radiated Interference Volts/meter 0.01 to 1 v/V

Susceptibility
15. Conducted Emission Millivolts 1 mV max.
16. Radiated Emission Millivolts/meter 1 mV/m max,
17. Time Delay Seconds 0.04 to 20 m sec
18. Frequency Stability (after warm-up)

Time Hertz/unit time Short: 1 to 5
Hz/10 min,
Long: 5 to 20 0
Hz/8 hr.
Temperature Hertz/° Celcius 1 to 100 Hz/°C
Supply voltage Hertz/volt 1 to 10 Hz/V
9
Table I (Cont'd)
19 . Readout Error Hertz 100 to 1000 Hz
20 . Impedance Ohms
RF/IF 50 to 600 Q
AF 3 to 600 Q
21. Standing Wave Ratio 1:1 to 3:1
22. Audio Output Power Watts 0.001 to 10 W
23. Audio Frequency Within ±3 dB from

Response 100 to 5000 Hz
24. Audio Distortion Percent 1 to 10%
25. Audio Hum & Noise Decibels -30 dB max

(below reference output)
26. Squelch Sensitivity Microvolts 0.05 to 0.5 yV
27. Input Voltage Volts

AC 10 0 to 12 5 VAC
20 0 to 250 VAC
40 to 400 Hz
DC 22 to 34 VDC
10
. : .
3.0. TEST METHODS AND PROCEDURES
3.1. GENERAL
The test procedures included in this handbook are suimnari zed

in Table II. Detailed procedures, including definitions of the
parameters measured, purpose of the measurement, general method
used, test equipment required, step-by-step procedures, data
required, and a discussion of measurement errors, are given in
Section 4.0. , below.
Table II lists (a) each receiver parameter for which a

procedure is given, (b) the sub-section of this handbook in
which it is given, (c) the nominal range over which the parameter
can be measured, (d) the best and typical measurement accuracies
attainable, and (e) the developmental status of the procedure.
The key to the status is as follows
O — Old. The procedure, or one similar to it, or the

basic principal underlying it, has been established
for sufficient time for it to have become known by
people who make receiver measurements
N — New. The procedure, to our knowledge, has not formally

appeared in the open literature.
T — Tested. The procedure has been used and found

suitable for the intended measurement.
P — Provisional. The procedure, or one similar to it,

has been used, but it has not yet been fully
tested and verified as suitable for the intended
measurement
11
U — Untested. The procedure has been drawn up for this
handbook; and although it is expected to be suitable
for the intended measurement, it has not been
adequately tested and verified.
The reason for the variety of statuses is explained below.
These procedures come from a variety of sources. The principal

sources of documented procedures are those listed in Section 1.3,
above. Table III shows the extent to which these sources have
contributed to this handbook. It can be seen that, although they
represent the technical output of the major standardizing
organizations (except for DoD) in the area of radio measurements,
they fail to provide adequate procedures for a majority of the
listed receiver parameters.
When the principal sources provided inadequate or no procedures

for certain parameters , new procedures were adapted from
information contained in handbooks and textbooks, technical
journals and reports, privately published monographs, and from
individual metrologists . Most of these ancillary sources do not
provide the required detailed information (e.g., step-by-step
procedures, equipment requirements, error analysis, etc.). Such
information has been newly written specifically for this handbook.
Thus, many of the procedures in Section 4,0., below, although
based upon sound principles have not been tested sufficiently
,
to validate that they are entirely practical and without

shortcomings in all their particulars . These are identified by
the status symbols "N", "P", and "U" in Table II.
12
.
,
.. . .
, .
. . ..: . .
TABLE II
Test Procedure Summary
Accuracy
êcuxon Parameter Range Best Typical Status
4. 1. 1. Gain-limited Sensitivity (AM) 0. 1 yV min 3% 5% - 20% 0 ,T
i 4. 1. 2. 6 dB SlVN Sensitivity (AM) 0. 1 yV rain. 3% 5% - 20% 0 ,T
4 1 . 3 12 d3 SINAD Sensitivity (AM) 0 1 viV m.in. 5% 8% - 30% N ,P
4 1. 4 Quieting Sensitivity (FM) 0. 1 vV min 3% 5% - 20% 0 /T
4 1. 5. 12 gB SINAD Sensitivity (FM) 0. 1 vV min 5% 8% - 30% 0 ,T
4. 1 6 . . 3. Xoise Factor - ANFM Method 1 dB - 15 dB 0 .3 dB 0 .5 dB - 1. 5 dB 0 ,T
4 1. 6 . 4 Noise Factor -
Y-Factor/Power Meter 1 dB - 15 dB 0 . 2 dB 0 . 3 dB - 1 dB 0 ,T
4 1 . 6 . 5 Noise Factor -
Y-Fac- or/Attenuator 1 dB - 15 dB 0 . 2 dB 0 .3 dB - 1 dB 0 /T
4 1 . 6. 6 . Noise Facror - 3 dB Method 1 dB - 15 d3 0 . 3 dB 0 .5 dB - 1. 5 dB 0 ,T
4 2 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 0 - 60 dB 0 . 2 dB 0 . 3 dB - 0 8 dB 0 ,T
4. 3. 1. Power Gain 0 - 120 dB 0 .3 dB 0 .4 dB - 1. 5 dB 0 ,P
4 3 . 2 . 3. Dynamic Range , MGC 120 dB max. 0 .3 dB 0 .4 dB - 3 dB N /U
3. 2 .
^ Dynamic Range , AGC 120 dB max. 0 .4 dB 1 dB - 4 dB N ,u
3. 3. 1. Automatic Gain Control 120 dB max gain . 6% 8% - 40 % 0 ,P

Gain vs. AGC Voltage 10 VDC max AGC .
4 3 . 3 . 2 . Automatic Gain Control

Leveling Effect 120 dB max 8% 10% - 40 % 0 ,P
A
3. 3. 3. Automatic Gain Control Attack Time :
Dynamic Characteristics <0 .1 ms

Decay Time
>10 sec. 6% 8% 40% 0,P
4.4.1.3. Selecrance - Method I 100 dB max. 6% 8% 40% 0,P
4.4.1.4. Selecrance - Method II 100 dB max. 6% 8% 40% 0,P
4.4.1.5. Selectance - Method III 40 dB max. 8% 12% 40% 0,T
4.4.2.3. CVr Bandvridth - Method I <100 Hz->25 kHz 3% 6% 25% 0,P
4.4.2.4. Civ Bandwidth - Method II <100 Hz->25 kHz 10% 12% 40% 0,T
4.4.3. Shape Factor -1:1 - 20:1 6% 10% 40% 0,P
4.4.4. Modulation Acceptance

Bandv.'idth <2 kHz->25 kHz 10% 15% 50% 0,T
4.4.5.3. Spurious Response

Attenuation (AM) 0 - 100 dB 0.3 dB 0.4 dB - 1.5 dB 0,P
4.4.5.4. Spurious Response

Attenuation (FM) 0 - 100 dB 0.3dB 0.4dB-1.5dB 0,P
13
1
TABLE II (Cont'd)
Accuracy
Section Parameter Range Best Typical Status
4.4.6. Noise Bandwidth <100 Hz->25 kHz 10% 15% - 50% 0,T
4.4.7. De sensitization 0 - 100 dB 0.4 dB 0.6 dB - 2 dB N,U
4.4.8. Cross Modulation 1 V max. 10% 12% - 50% 0,P
4.4.9. Adjacent Channel Selectivity 0 - 120 dB 0 . 7 dB 0 . 9 dB - 2 . 5 dB 0,T
4.4.10.3. Intermodulation Distortion

Method I 20 100 dB 0 . 5 dB 0 . 8 dB - 3 dB N,P

Method II 1 yV - 1 V 3% 5% - 20% 0,P

Method III 1 yV - 1 V 3% 5% - 20% 0,P

Method IV 1 yV - 1 V 5% 8% - 30% 0,P
4.4.11. Impulse Bandwidth <100 Hz->25 kHz 8% 10% - 30% 0,,p
4.5.1. Conducted Interference

Susceptibility (AM) 1 - 1000 mV 5% 8% - 30% ,p
4.5.2. Conducted Interference

Susceptibility (FM) 1 - 1000 mV 5% 8% - 30% N ,p
4.5.3. Radiated Interference

Susceptibility (AM) < 100 V/m 100% - 1000% 0, u
f
4.5.4. Radiated Interference

Susceptibility (FM) < 100 V/m 100% - 1000% 0,rU
4.6.1. Conducted Emission -130 to 0 dBm 0 .3, dB 0 , . 5 dB - 1.5 dB N,,P
4.6.2. Radiated Emission 0 - 1000 yV/m 100% - 1000% 0,rU
4.7 Time Delay 10 y sec -

100 msec 2% 3% - 10% N,-U
4.8. Frequency Stability 0.1 - 1000 Hz 0 .2, Hz 0. 2 . Hz - 1 Hz N,,P
4.9. Frequency Readout Error 0 - 10 kHz (Readout resolution) N,,P
4.10.3. Impedance - Method I 1 - 1000 n 4% 5% - 20% 0,rT
4.10.4 Impedance - Method II 1 - 1000 n 4% 5% - 20% 0,rT
4 .11 Standing Wave Ratio 1:1 - 10 : 6% 8% - 20% 0,-T
4.13.1. Audio Gain 0 - 6 0 dB 0 .5. dB 0 ., 7 dB - 2 dB N,,P
4.13.2.3. Audio Frequency Response

Method I 10 Hz - 25 kHz 0 .5. dB 0. 7 . dB - 2 dB 0,,T

Method II 10 Hz - 25 kHz 0 .5. dB 0. 7 . dB - 2 dB 0,rT

Method III 10 Hz - 25 kHz 10% - 100% 0,,T
14
TABLE II (Cont'd)
Accuracy
Section Parameter Range Best Typical Status
4..13,,2,.6. Audio Frequency Response

Method IV 10 Hz - 25 kHz 0 .5
, dB 0 , . 7 dB - 2 dB 0,,P
4,.13,,3. Audio Linearity 0 - 60 dB 0,.5 dB 0 , . 7 dB - 2 dB 0,,T
4..13,,4, Audio Distortion 0.1% - 20% 8% 10% - 50% 0,fT
4..13,.5, Hum and Noise -0 dB to -40 dB

below P 0,.5 dB 0 .. 7 dB - 2 dB 0,,P
o
4,,13,.6. Noise Limiter Threshold 0 - 10 V 2% 4% - 15% N,,P
4.,13,,7. Squelch Sensitivity 0.01 ViV — 1 yV 5% 8% - 30% 0,,P
4.,14,,1. Input Power (AC/DC) 1 W - 150 W 2% 4% - 15% 0,,T
4.,14,,2. Output Voltage (DC) 0 - > + 300 V 1% 2% - 10% 0,,T
4.,14,.3,.3. Voltage Regulation - Line 0.001% - 10% 2% 4% - 15% 0,,T
4,.14,.3, 4
, . Voltage Regulation - Load 0.001% - 10% 2% 4% - 15% 0,,T
4.,14,.4, Ripple and Noise 1 mv - 10 V 1% 2% - 10% 0,,T
15
TABLE III
Sources of Documented Procedures
o
CD 7 7 <
CO CO CO \D c c c in
0 o 0 m as
(N
m JJ T T 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
o
r- u u u +J H 1
H 1 i i 1-1 m CO -.0 c/l

0 0 0 0
s
1
S XI 0 u o Cu J
1
c-
IEEE IEEE IEEE
Z fi
r
;3
m a; c2 CU Cd. a; ^ s n: r:
Gain-Limited Sensitivity S L S s S u
6 dB SN/N Sensitivity s s u
12 dB SINAD Sensitivity (AM) u
Quieting Sensitivity S S ^ s
12 dB SINAD Sensitivity (FM) s S
Noise Factor S U S
Signal-to-Noise Ratio U
Power Gain
Dynamic Range L L
Automatic Gain Control S S L L L
Selectance L s
CW Bandwidth L U S S
Shape Factor
Modulation Acceptance Bandwidth S U
Spurious Response Attenuation L S S s S S u S S
Noise Bandwidth L U
Desensitization S S u N
Cross Modulation S S S S
Adjacent Channel Selectivity S S s S u S

Intermodulation Distortion U S L S S s N N S
Impulse Bandwidth L N
Conducted Interference Susceptibility (AM) L s L L S L L
Conducted Interference Susceptibility (FM) L s L L S L L
Radiated Interference Susceptibility (AM) L L N s L L
Radiated Interference Susceptibility (FM) L L s L N s L L
Conducted Emission L L L s S L L L s L L
Radiated Emission * L L L s S L L L s L L
Time Delay *
Frequency Stability S S L L L
Frequency Readout Error *
Impedance
Standing Wave Ratio * * * * * * * *
Detectors * * * * *
Audio Gain * * S s * * *
,
Audio Frequency Response s S L S s N L L L U S * s

Audio Linearity * * * *
Audio Distortion U s S S S S S *
Hum and Noise L s s * S L N N * *
Noise Limiter Threshold * * * * * * *
Squelch Sensitivity S * s •k * S * * * * * * * *
Input Power * * * * * * *
Output Voltage * * * *
Voltage Regulation * * * * *
Ripple and Noise L * * * * *
Key: * — No procedure provided S Small Modification

U — Procedure used as provided L -- Large Modification
N Procedure not used
16
. .
The procedures in this handbook, therefore, are a mixture

(a) of proven methods and (b) of "unproven" methods that are based
upon either proven principles or upon the adaptation of similar
methods to the requirements at hand. The new, provisional, or
untested procedures should be used v/ith technical prudence, but
may be expected to yield the desired results v/ithout significant
modifications
3.2. STANDARD TEST CONDITIONS
Certain test conditions apply to the majority of these

procedures and therefore can be "standardized." Deviations from
these standard conditions occur in specific instances, and these
are made clear in Section 4.0.
These standard test conditions are recommendations only,

and may be modified according to the needs of a particular
measurement situation. IVhen this is done, the prevailing test
conditions should be recorded with the test data so that proper
account can be taken thereof in the interpretation of the
,
measurement results
3.2.1. AMBIENT CONDITIONS
3.2.1.1. STANDARD TEMPERATURE
Standard temperature shall be +20°C to + 35°C.
3.2.1.2. STANDARD RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Standard relative humidity shall be as f ollov/s :
a. Zero to 90 percent at 20®C to 30°C

b. Zero to 70 uercent at 30°C to 35°C
17
.
3.2.1.3. STANDARD ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE
Standard atmospheric pressure shall be the ambient atmospheric

pressure at the time of the test.
, 3.2.2. PRIMARY INPUT POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Standard input power supply voltage shall be within ±5

percent of the mean of the rated operating voltage range of
the receiver, as given in the manufacturer's specifications.
3.2.3. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY CONDITIONS
These tests shall be conducted, as far as practicable, in

areas that are sufficiently free from electromagnetic interference
fields to allow the measurements to be made without significant
adverse effect on the results. Primary input power sources shall
be sufficiently filtered to accomplish the same end. Test
instrumentation shall be properly shielded, filtered, and
grounded so as to minimize erroneous results caused by
extraneous signals from these or other sources
3.2.4. RECEIVER PREPARATION
3.2.4.1. OPERATING CONDITIONS
When important to the test results, the receiver should be

situated so that it closely approximates the physical and
electrical conditions in which it is intended to operate. All
accessories that may affect test results shall be installed
and put into operation.
18
. .
3.2.4.2. RECEIVER CONDITION
Before any raeasurements are performed, the receiver shall

be in proper operating condition as stated in Section 2.2., above.
3.2.4.3. v:ar:-i-up ti:<ie
Sufficient warm-up tine, e.g., from one-half to two hours,

shall be provided before any measurements are performed to insure
adequate stabilization of the receiver paramieters
3.2.5. TEST INSTRUI-IENTATION PREPARATION
3.2.5.1. OPERATING CONDITIONS
Test instruments shall be operated according to the

manufacturer's instructions. Check for proper grounding, proper
connections of cables and probes, and proper shielding, filtering,
and isolation as required. Sufficient vrarm-up time shall be
provided to insure stable operation.
3.2.5.2. CALIBRATION
All test equipment must meet the manufacturer's specifications

on accuracy and other performance parameters. Information on
accuracy, frequency response, spectral purity, etc., must be
verified and at hand in order to obtain meaningful results from
these tests
3.2.6. TERIÎNATIONS
All terminations to receiver terminals (ports) shall be of

the proper impedance and povrer rating, as specified by the
receiver manufacturer. They shall be adequately shielded to
prevent interference to, or from, other parts of the
measurement systemi.
19
3.2.7. TEST FREQUENCIES
No standard test frequencies are specified in this handbook.

Test frequencies are to be determined according to the purposes
of the test.
3.2,8. SIGNAL LEVELS
3.2.8.1. INPUT SIGNAL VOLTAGE
No standard input signal level is specified in this handbook.

When a specific level is required for a particular test, it is
so stated in that test procedure.
R.F. input signal levels are expressed in terms of the open

circuit voltage across the output terminals of the source of the
input signal. If an impedance matching, filter, or attenuating
network is used between the signal generator output terminals
and the receiver input terminals, the input signal level is the
open circuit voltage across the output terminals of the network.
If no such network is used, the input signal is the open circuit
voltage across the output terminals of the generator.
3.2.8.2. AUDIO OUTPUT POWER
Reference audio output power shall be established for the

receiver as one of the following power levels:
a. 50% of manufacturer's rated audio output power
b. Maximum audio output power having a 12 dB SINAD ratio

(6.3% noise and distortion)
c. Manufacturer's rated audio output power
20
d. Some other power level that is determined by the
characteristics of the receiver or the requirements of the test
In this handbook, reference audio output power is taken to be

50% of manufacturer's rated audio output power. Any deviation
from this meaning is identified in the text. When the manufacturer
has not given a rated audio output power for the receiver under
test, establish one using a reasonable criterion, such as the
power level at the 10% distortion point.
In all cases, the basis for the reference output power

level should be stated in the test report.
3.2.9. MODULATION
3.2.9.1. AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Standard amplitude modulation shall be 30% with a 1000

hertz sinusoid voltage.
3.2.9.2. SINGLE SIDEBAND MODULATION
Standard single sideband suppressed carrier modulation

frequencies shall be the two tones of 400 hertz and 2500 hertz.
The amplitudes of these two tones shall be equal.
3.2.9.3. FREQUENCY MODULATION
Standard frequency modulation shall be ±60% of rated system

deviation with a 1000 hertz sinusoid voltage. Rated system
deviation shall be as given by the receiver manufacturer; or,
if this is not specified, it may be taken to be the CW bandwidth
of the receiver. CAUTION: The CW bandwidth may not be suitable
as a basis for determining rated system deviation in some
receivers that are not designed correctly for FM reception.
21
3.3. MEASUREMENT ERRORS
A measurement error is the difference between the true value

and the measured value of a quantity.
3.3.1. TYPES OF ERRORS
Measurement errors are of two types: systematic and random.

A systematic error is the difference between the true value and
the limiting mean of a set of measured values of a quantity. A
random error is the error caused by a random process, as
contrasted with a systematic or deterministic process.
3.3.2. ORIGINS OF ERRORS
Measurement errors result primarily from uncertainties in

the data. They can also result from procedural mistakes; but
this source of error can be removed by using care, repeating
measurements, cross-checking, and a variety of other procedural
methods. Uncertainties in the data come from such sources as
(a) uncertainties in the true value of a meter or dial reading,
(b) uncertainties in the calibration of an instrument, (c)
imprecision in the indicated meter reading due to random

fluctuations or poor resolution, (d) variations in the parameter
being measured during the measurement interval, and (e) variations
caused by human frailties in performing the measurement.
3.3.3. ERROR EQUATION
The total measurement error is obtained by means of an

error equation. The error equation comes from an error analysis
of the measurement process, and contains terms which represent
the individual sources of error.
22
:
A thorough error analysis of each measurement procedure is

beyond the scope of this handbook. Further, the desired level
of precision for these tests does not warrant a highly exhaustive
treatment. Therefore, only the principal sources of error have
been accounted for in the error equations provided in this
handbook.
The total error of a measiarement normally consists of both

systematic and random errors. In general, the error equation
applies separately to both types of errors. Thus, the error
equation is used twice, once for systematic errors and once
for random errors. The total error is then expressed in two
parts, viz., a systematic part and a random part. In some
cases, one type may predominate over the other, in which case
the total error may be substantially systematic or random.
The error equations given in Section 4.0. are primarily for

use with systematic uncertainties, although they can also be
used with random uncertainties. For proper use of these
equations, refer to Section 3.3.5., below.
3.3.4. REDUNDANCY
Measurements should be made more than once for the following

reasons
a. Gross errors and mistakes may be revealed.
b. The average result usually has a smaller error than

each individual result.
c. The spread of the individual results provides an

estimate of the measurement error.
23
Repeating the measurement many times can reduce the random
error, but it will not reduce the systematic error. Systematic
error is reduced by using test equipment having greater
inherent accuracy.
Random error is expressed in terms of the standard

deviation, s, of the measurement data. It is common practice
to take 3s (three standard deviations) as the random error
of the measured value of the parameter.
Standard deviation decreases with the square root of n,

the number of measurement results. Significant improvements
accrue as n increases from one to two to three, but note
that the improvement decreases with increasing n. Seldom
is it worthwhile to repeat measurements of the type given
in this handbook more than ten times.
3.3.5. POOLING ERRORS
Independent systematic errors are combined algebraically.

That is, if one error is positive (+) and the other negative
(-) , the total of these two errors is their algebraic sum.
If a systematic error can be either positive or negative (±)
then judgement must be exercised when combining it with other

errors. Unless knowledge about an error directs otherwise, the
worst-case combination should be used. This normally means that
the errors are pooled by adding their absolute values, thus
disregarding their algebraic signs. If there is some inter-
dependence (correlation) between individual errors, it may
be taken into account to obtain a pooled error that is smaller
than their worst-case sum.
24
.
Random errors are combined on a root-mean-square basis.

That is, the two errors, Aa and Ab, produce a total error,
Ac, given by the equation
2 2 1
Ac = [(Aa) + (Ab) ]^ .
When there is a question as to whether an error is

systematic or random, usual practice is to pool it with
other errors on a worst-case basis.
3.3.6. OBTAINING MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTIES
In order to estimate a measurement error, it is necessary

to obtain quantitative values for the uncertainties in the data.
The usual source of information for systematic measurement
uncertainties is the manufacturer's accuracy specification
for the particular test equipment involved. An alternative,
and possibly superior, source is a recent calibration certificate
for the instrument, which should include the limits of error
on the calibration results. Lacking either of these sources,
measurement uncertainties can be obtained by measuring a
known quantity with the instrument, and comparing the measurement
results with the known value.
Random uncertainties are obtained from a statistical analysis

of the data. Refer to standard textbooks on the subject for
procedures (see Bibliography)
25
:
4.0. DETAILED TEST PROCEDURES
4.1. SENSITIVITY
The sensitivity of a receiver is a measure of its ability to

receive weak signals. To express this ability in quantitative terms,
sensitivity is broadly defined as the smallest R.F. input signal
necessary to produce an acceptable demodulated output signal.
Several types of sensitivity are defined to provide for different
types of receivers and different receiving requirements. Of these,
the following types are described, and measurement methods are
given
1 . Sensitivity (Gain-Limited AM receivers)
2. 6 dB SN/N sensitivity (AM receivers)
3. 12 dB SINAD sensitivity (AM and FM receivers)
4. Quieting sensitivity (FM receivers)
5. Noise factor (AM and FM receivers)
26
.
4.1.1. SENSITIVITY OF A GAIN-LIMITED AM RECEIVER
4.1.1.1. DEFINITIONS
a. The sensitivity of a gain-limited AI4 receiver is the

open circuit output voltage, in microvolts, from a signal generator
amplitude modulated 30% with a 1000 Hz sinusoid, that will produce
reference audio output power from the receiver output terminals
b. A gain-limited receiver is a receiver whose gain and

internal noise are such that, when its input termination has a
noise temperature of 290K, reference audio output power cannot be
produced by amplification of system noise alone.
4.1.1.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to measure the

sensitivity of gain-limited All receivers. For such receivers,
sensitivity is essentially a measure of the total receiver gain.
Tne method ignores the effects of distortion; therefore, for
non-linear receivers it does not yield accurate results.
4.1.1.3. METHOD
The method uses an amplitude modulated signal generator

and a voltmeter or power meter as shown in figure 4.1.1. The
signal generator supplies a known voltage to the receiver at
the measurement frequency. The voltmeter or power meter indicates
the receiver output signal level.
The generator level is adjusted to the open circuit output

voltage that will produce reference audio output power from the
receiver. This voltage is the sensitivity of the receiver.
27
( 1 ^
o
— ct: LxJ
o
I I
I— 1— OL Cd
<C I— LU LU LU
^ 3 1—
I — I I— h-
_1
o O UJ
Q- s:
q: lu
Lu a:.
O
>
-H
>
-H
-P
H
U)
C
Q)
A 03
'd

—
1
o
UJ
o 1—
LU 121
DC •=x.
o o
+J
O CD CO
-< q;
Q
LU O
o
ic
Q- (— I—
3
21 <: LU
——
^
_I 1—
O
<c
LU
LU
e3
28
.
Measurement uncertainties as small as 3% are possible under

best conditions, and range from approximately 5% to 20% under
typical conditions. This method uses rudimentary and commonly
available test equipment.
4.1.1.4. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. Signal generator capable of amplitude modulation
2. Input impedance matching network
3. Termination resistor for receiver audio output port
4a. AF power meter
OR,
4b. A.C. voltmeter
4.1.1.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the input port of the receiver to the output port

of the SIGNAL GENERATOR through an IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORK
that provides the specified source impedance, , to the receiver
at the measurement frequency, f^. If the signal generator output
impedance equals Z^, no matching network is required.
2a. Connect the TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance equal

to the specified load resistance, R^ , and a power rating in excess
of the receiver's rated audio output power level, to the audio
output port of the receiver. Connect the A.C. VOLTMETER across this
resistor
OR,
2b. Connect the POWER METER, having an input impedance equal

to the specified load resistance, R^ to the audio output port of
,
the receiver.
29
.
3a. Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate the reference

output power, The voltage to be measured is given by the equation
.
o * o £
OR,
3b. Set the power meter on a range to indicate the reference

output power, P^.
4. Set receiver controls as given in Table IV.
5. Tune the signal generator and the receiver to the measurement

frequency, f^
6. Adjust the amplitude modulation in the signal generator

to 30% at 10 00 Hz.
7. Adjust the output level of the signal generator to give

reference audio power output, P^ from the receiver.
,
8. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, , in microvolts,

at the OUTPUT TERMINALS of the matching network, if used; otnerwise,
at the output terminals of the generator. This is the SENSITIVITY
of the receiver at frequency f^.
4.1.1.6. DATA REQUIRED
1. Record the measurement frequency, f^, in kilohertz or

megahertz.
2. Record the value of source impedance, , in ohms, connected

to receiver input port.
30
. .
TABLE IV
Gain- Limited Sensitivity
Initial Control Settings
con tiro L betting
J. canu owxtcn ±. AS aesirea
r x^cvûciioy 1 uxixxig ^ .
•3 } "Do Îr
J • XT c ClJS.
4 RP f^s 1 n 4 M ^ V TTmm "1
•J m TP "i n -J
o •
AP C.^ ^ n D .
A 3 V n Tim T TTl
1'iCtXXlUU.lll
.
7 IjXXIC oaxxi 7 Vw/p t X CJXl dX
Q
o . Detector Mode Q
o .
AM
AM
Q Beat Frequency Oscillator Q Ur r
1 n
Br u r requency ±u . JN . A .
11. IF Bandwidth 11. As desired
12. AF Bandwidth 12. As desired
13. Noise Limiter 13. OFF
14. Squelch Level 14. OFF
15 . AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. MGC
16. Meter Switch 16 . Optional
31
,
3. Record the value of termination resistance, R^

in ohms, connected to receiver audio output terminals.
4a. Record the output voltage, , in volts
OR,
4b. Record the reference output power, , in watts.
5. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E_j^, in microvolts,

at the output terminals of the matching network, if used; other-
wise, at the output terminals of the generator. E^ is the sensi-
tivity of the receiver.
4.1.1.7. MEASUREMENT ERRORS
The principal sources of measurement error are the following:
1. Uncertainty, Ae^, in the measured value of E^
2a. Uncertainty, Ae^ , in the measured value of E^
OR,
2b. Uncertainty, '^P^ / in the measured value of
The total relative uncertainty, Ae^(%) , in the receiver

sensitivity, E^, expressed as a percent, is given by the equations
Ae .(%) = (-^ X loo) +(4^ X loo) ,
OR
AE^(%) = X lOo) +( X
I 100^ .
The uncertainty, AE^, is obtained from the manufacturer's

specifications on the output level indication of the signal
generator. Uncertainties AE^ and/or AP^ are obtained from the
manufacturer's specifications on the voltmeter and/or power
meter, respectively.
32
4.1.2. 6 dB SN/N SENSITIVITY OF A NOISE-LIMITED AM RECEIVER
a. The 6 dB SN/N sensitivity of a noise-limited AM receiver

is the open circuit output voltage, in microvolts, from a signal
generator amplitude modulated 30% with a 1000 Hz sinusoid, that
will produce a signal-plus-noise-to-noise ratio (SN/N) of 4
(6 dB) at the reference audio output power level from the receiver
output terminals.
b. A noise- limited receiver is a receiver whose gain and

noise temperature of 290K, reference audio output power can be
produced in its output termination by amplification of system
noise alone.
4.1.2.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to measure the 6 dB

SN/N sensitivity of noise-limited AM receivers. For such receiv-
ers, 6 dB SN/N sensitivity is essentially a measure of the
smallest signal that has a usable strength. The method ignores
the effects of distortion; therefore, for non-linear receivers
it does not yield accurate results.
4.1.2.3. METHOD
The method uses an amplitude modulated signal generator and

a power meter or true rms voltmeter as shown in figure 4.1.2.
The signal generator supplies a known voltage to the receiver
at the measurement frequency. The voltmeter or power meter indi-
cates the receiver output signal level.

voltage that will produce signal-plus-noise-to-noise ratio
a 6 dB
at reference audio output power from the receiver. This voltage
is the 6 dB SN/N sensitivity of the receiver.
33
1
o
1—1 d
\— o
<: I—
o O LU
llj
llj cc:
-p
>
A m
C/3
LJ- 1—
LlJ cn
>
—
1
o PQ
-a
CE
I—
LU <^
u
Q
mo
D4
r3
I
4J
0)
W
UJ
C_J CD -P
^^^ 03
<: 1— q; CU
Q ni o
1
Eh
UJ 2
(_)
- 1—
^ CC LU
l-H^^ CM
cc
o
1 1—
cC =a:
q;
CD LU
1—1
GE
34
.

typical conditions This method uses rudimentary and commonly
.
1 . Signal generator capable of amplitude modulation
4a. AF power meter
OR,
4b. True rms voltmeter
4.1.2.5. PROCEDURE

that provides the specified source impedance, Z^, to the receiver
at the measurement frequency, f^ . If the signal generator output

to the specified load resistance, R,^ , and a power rating in excess
of the receiver's rated audio output power level, to the audio output
port of the receiver. Connect the TRUE RMS VOLTMETER across the
resistor
OR,
35
Connect the POWER METER, having an input impedance equal
2b.
to the specified load resistance, R^ to the audio output port of
,
the receiver.

output power, P^. The voltage to be measured is given by the
equation
E
o
=\/pT7
' o £
OR,
3b. Set the power meter on a range to indicate the refer-

ence output power, P^.
4. Set the receiver controls as given in Table V.
Note: Check to make sure the maximum gain setting does

not produce signal clipping or compression in the
latter IF amplifier stages. If clipping or com-
pression occurs, reduce RF or IF gain.
5. Tune the signal generator and the receiver to the

measurement frequency, f^.

to 30% at 1000 Hz.
7. With the signal generator connected and its output set

to zero, adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce 25% of
reference audio output power, P^. This will be noise power only.
Adjust the output level of the signal generator to give

8.
reference audio output power, P^. This will be approximately 25%

noise power and 75% audio signal power (1000 Hz), and corresponds
to a 6 dB signal-plus-noise-to-noise ratio.
Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^ in micro-

9. ,
volts, at the OUTPUT TERMINALS of the matching network, if used;

otherwise, at the output terminals of the generator. This is
the 6 dB SN/N SENSITIVITY of the receiver at the frequency f^.
36
. .
TABLE V
6 dB SN/N Sensitivity
Control Setting
1 Band Switch 1 As desired
2 . Frequency Tuning 2 As desired
3 . Antenna Trimmer 3 Peak
4 . RF Gain 4 Maximum
5 . IF Gain 5 . Maximum
6 . AF Gain 6 . As required
7 . Line Gain 7. Optional
8 . Detector Mode 8 AM
9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9 . OFF
10 . BFO Frequency 10 . N.A.
12 . AF Bandwidth 12. As desired
14. Squelch Level 14 . OFF
16 . Meter Switch 16 . Optional
37
1. Record the measurement frequency, f^ , in kilohertz or

megahertz
2. Record the value of source impedance, , in ohms, connected

to receiver input port.
3. Record the value of termination resistance, R^, in ohms,

connected to receiver audio output terminals.
4a. Record the output voltage, E^, in volts.
OR, '
^
5. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E^ , in microvolts.

at the output terminals of the matching network, if used; otherwise,
at the output terminals of the
ti generator. E^ is the 6 dB SN/N
sensitivity of the receiver.
The principal sources of measurement error are the following
1. Uncertainty, AE.1 , in the measured value of E.

1
2a. Uncertainty, AE , in the measured value of E

o o
OR,
2b. Uncertainty, AP , in the measured value of P

o o
38
The total relative uncertainty, AE^ (%) , in the receiver
sensitivity, E^, expressed as a percent, is given by the
equations
/AE. \ / AE •
AE^(%) = xlOOj + X looj ,
or
AE .(%) = xloo) 4-
(I ^ X lOo)

generator. Uncertainties AE^ and/or AP^ are obtained from
the manufacturer's specifications on the voltmeter and/or
power meter, respectively.
39
. .
4.1.3. 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY OF A NOISE-LIMITED AM RECEIVER
a. SINAD is an acronym for the phrase "signal plus noise

plus distortion to noise plus distortion ratio."
P
S + N + D (s+n+d
SINAD = )
N + D
^(n+d)
b. The 12 dB SINAD sensitivity of a noise-limited AM receiver

is the open -circuit output voltage, in microvolts, from a signal
generator amplitude modulated 30% with a 1000 Hz sinusoid, that
will produce a SINAD of 16 (12 dB) at no less than 50% of the
c. A noise-limited receiver is a receiver whose gain and

noise temperature of 290K, reference audio output power can be
produced in its output termination by amplification of system
noise alone.
4.1.3.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to measure the 12 dB

SINAD sensitivity of noise-limited AM receivers. For such receivers,
SINAD sensitivity is a measure of the smallest typical signal that
has usable strength and that produces an audio output signal of
acceptable quality. The method takes into account the effects of
distortion within the receiver; therefore, it can be a more
meaningful measure of sensitivity than 6 dB SN/N sensitivity
for real-world receivers
40
.
4.1.3.3. METHOD

an audio distortion analyzer as shown in figure 4.1.3. The signal
generator supplies a known voltage to the receiver at the
measurement frequency. The distortion analyzer measures the power
in the audio output from the receiver under two conditions; viz.,
(a) with the 1000 Hz modulating signal present, and (b) with the
1000 Hz modulating signal filtered from the audio output power.
The generator level is adjusted to the open circuit output voltage
that causes the ratio of (a) to (b), above, expressed in decibels,
to be 12 dB. This voltage is the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity of the
receiver

typical conditions. This method uses commonly available test
equipment of moderate sophistication.
4. Audio distortion analyzer
4.1.3.5. PROCEDURE
1.Connect the input port of the receiver to the output port

of the SIGNAL GENERATOR through an IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORK that
provides the specified source impedance, Z^, to the receiver at
the measurement frequency, f^. If the signal generator output
impedance equals Z ^ no matching network is required.
41
1
>— q: o q;
o
1
I— I— Ul
I
<a; I— I— M
q; >-
—
t I (—1 o _J
h- <:
llj c/l^
UJ ck: 1-1<t
Q
< >
U- I—
UJ o
>
»—
o t—
UJ
c
UJ
oo
^^
Q z: o
ui o 3
Q. 1— t—
S cC UJ
^
•-H 2:
_i 1—
o
<: <
CD UJ
1—!
00 Ul
42
2. Connect the TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance equal
to the specified load resistance, R^ and a power rating in excess
,

output port of the receiver. Connect the audio DISTORTION ANALYZER
across this resistor.
3. Set the distortion analyzer on a range to indicate the

reference output power, P^.
4. Set receiver controls as given in Table VI.
Note: Check to make sure the maximum gain setting does not
produce signal clipping or compression in the latter
IF amplifier stages. If clipping or compression
occurs, reduce RF or IF gain.
5. Tune the signal generator and the receiver to the measure-

ment frequency, f^.

to 30% at 1000 Hz.
7. Set the signal generator output level to 10 00 microvolts.
8. Adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce reference

audio output power, P^. This is
^(s+n+d)*
9. Adjust the distortion analyzer so that the 1000 Hz rejec-

tion filter tunes out the 1000 Hz modulation from the signal
generator.
10. Measure the noise plus distortion output power, ^(j^+^j)*
11. Calculate SINAD, in decibels, from the equation

P
SINAD (dB) = 10 log 5—2
(n+d)
43
TABLE VI
12 dB SINAD Sensitivity (AM)
Control Setting
1. Band Switch 1. As desired
2. Frequency Tuning 2 . As desired
3. Antenna Trimmer 3. Peak
4 . RF Gain 4 . Maximum
7. Line Gain 7. Optional
8. Detector Mode 8. AM
9. Beat Frequency Oscillator '3. OFF
10. BFO Frequency 10. N.A.
11. IF Bandwidtn 11. As desired
15. AGC/xMGC Mode Switcn 15. As desired
16. Meter Switcn 16. Optional
44
12. If SINAD calculated in Step 11 is greater (or less)
than 12 dB , decrease (or increase) the signal generator output
by 3 dB or smaller and repeat Steps
through 11. Continue this
8
procedure until 12 dB SINAD is obtained.
Note: If 12 dB SINAD cannot be reached by INCREASING

the signal generator output, the receiver is
probably distortion-limited. In this case, an
alternate reference SINAD such as 6 dB may be used.
13. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, , in

microvolts, at the OUTPUT TERMINALS of the matching network, if
used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the generator.
This is the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY of the receiver at frequency f
o

megahertz
2. Record the value of source impedance, , in ohms,

connected to receiver input port.
3. Record the value of termination resistance, R^^, in ohms,

4. Record the reference output power, , in watts.
5. Record the SINAD ratio in decibels.

6. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E^ , in microvolts.
at the output terminals of the matching network, if used, otherwise,
at the output terminals of the generator.
1 E^ is the 12 dB SINAD
sensitivity of the receiver
45
,
The principal sources of measurement error are the

following:
1. Uncertainty, AE^, in the measured value of E^
2. Uncertainty,
^
AP , in the measured value of P
o o
3. Uncertainty, AP in the measured value of P

n+d
,
n+d
,
The total relative uncertainty, AE^(%), in the 12 dB SINAD

equation
AE .
\ / n AP \ / -, AP
AE
The uncertainty, AE^ , is obtained from the manufacturer's

generator.
^ Uncertainties AP are obtained from the
and AP
n+d
o
manufacturer's specifications on the distortion analyzer.
46
4.1.4. QUIETING SENSITIVITY OF AN FM RECEIVER WITH ONE
OR MORE LIMITERS
4.1.4.1. DEFINITION
The quieting sensitivity of a receiver is the minimum amount

of signal from an unmodulated standard input signal source that
is required to produce 20 decibels of noise quieting measured at
the receiver audio output. (EIA RS-204)
Noise quieting is the reduction of audio noise output power

caused by the presence of an input signal to the receiver.
4.1.4.2. PURPOSE

quieting sensitivity of FM receivers containing one or more
amplitude limiter stages preceding the FM demodulator circuit.
For such receivers, quieting sensitivity is a measure of the
degree to which its limiters suppress amplitude fluctuations
such as external and internal noise signals. The method ignores
the effects of non-linearity in the audio stages; therefore, it
may yield slightly inaccurate results.
4.1.4.3. METHOD
The method uses an unmodulated signal generator and a true

rms voltmeter or power meter as shown in figure 4.1.4. The signal
generator supplies a known voltage to the receiver at the
measurement frequency. The voltmeter or power meter indicates the
receiver output noise power level.
47
1
-P
r-(
>
•^^
-P
•H
w
c
CO
Hc
-P
(U
•^^
d
a
o
4J
cn
w
(U
Eh
CE
C3
=3:
in o
ED
os
h- I—
—
1
d UJ
r-i
Cm
o
—J I—
CJ3 LlJ
48
voltage that produces 20 dB of noise quieting as measured with
the voltmeter or power meter. This voltage is the quieting
sensitivity of the receiver.

1. CW signal generator
4a. AF power meter
OR,
4.1.4.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the input port of the receiver to the output

port of the SIGNAL GENERATOR through an IMPEDANCE MATCHING
NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance, , to
the receiver at the measurement frequency, f^. If the signal
generator output impedance equals , no matching network is
required.
49
2a. Connect the TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance
equal to the specified load resistance, R^, and a power rating
in excess of the receiver's rated audio output power level,
to the audio output port of the receiver. Connect the TRUE RMS
VOLTMETER across this resistor.
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R^ , to the audio output port of the
receiver.
3a. Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate 25% of the

d output power,
rated . The voltage to be measured is given by
the equation
E = 0.5 VP R„
^ o £
o
OR,
3b. Set the power meter on a range to indicate 25% of the

rated output power, P^.
4. Set receiver controls as given in Table VII.

6. Adjust the signal generator so that the signal is

unmodulated. '
'
7. With the signal generator connected and its output set to

zero, adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce 25% of rated
audio output power, P^ . This will be noise power only.
50
TABLE VII
Quieting Sensitivity
Control Setting
2. Frequency Tuning 2. As desired
3 . Antenna Trimmer 3. Peak
4. RF Gain 4. Maximum
5 . IF Gain 5. Maximum
8 . Detector .4ode 8. FM
10 . BFO Frequency 10 . N. A.
14 . Squelch Level 14. OFF
15 . AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . As desired
51
.. . . . .
8. Increase the output level of the signal generator until the

audio output noise power level is reduced to 0.25% of P (0.0025 P ).
o o
This is a reduction to 20 dB below the level indicated in Step 7^
above
Note: If the output noise power level cannot be

^ reduced to 0.25% of P , select some other
o
target value such as 2.5% of P (reduction
o
of 10 dB)
9. Determine the open circuit signal voltage E. , in microvolts,

at the OUTPUT TERMINALS of the matching network, if used; otherwise,
at the output terminals of the generator. This is the 20 dB
QUIETING SENSITIVITY of the receiver at the frequency f^
4.1.4.6. DATA REQU IRED

megahertz

3. Record the value of termination resistance, R^ , in ohms,

connected to receiver audio output terminals
4a. Record the measured output voltage, E^, in volts,

from Step 3a, above.
OR,
4b. Record the measured output power, 0.25 P^ , in watts,

from Step 3b, above.
5. Record the measured output voltage, 0.1 E^ , in volts,

or the measured output power, 0 .0 0 25 P^ , in watts, from Step 8
above
52
(If the 10 dB , or other, level of quieting sensitivity is
measured, record the measured values of output voltage or power
for this criterion.)
6. Record the open circuit signal voltage, in microvolts,

at the output terminals of the matching network, if used; other-
wise, at the output terminals of the generator. is the
quieting sensitivity of the receiver
Uncertainty, in the measured value of

'
1. AE_j^, E_j^
2. Uncertainty, '^^q ' the measured value of E^
3. Uncertainty, / the measured value of
The total relative uncertainty, Ae^(%) , in the receiver

equations
AE^(%) = (-^ X loo] +(yJT ^ X looj ,
or
AE .(%) X loo) t(^^^ X lOo)

manufacturer's specifications on the voltmeter and/or Dower
53
4.1.5. 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY OF AN FM RECEIVER WITH
J ONE OR MORE LIMITERS
a. SINAD is an acronym for the phrase "signal plus noise

plus distortion to noise plus distortion ratio."
SINAD =
blNAU
S + ^ + P = !i£±n±i)
N + D
(n+d)
b. The 12 dB SINAD sensitivity of an FM receiver with one

or more limiters is the open circuit output voltage, in micro-
volts, from a signal generator frequency modulated ±60% of
maximum rated system deviation with a 1000 Hz sinusoid, that
will produce a SINAD of 16 (12 dB) at no less than 50% of the
Note: The rated system deviation, in kilohertz, is

found by reference to specifications for the
given system. It is typically ±5 kHz to ±25 kHz.
4.1.5.2. PURPOSE

12 dB SINAD sensitivity of FM receivers containing one or more
amplitude limiter stages preceding the FM demodulator circuit.
For such receivers, 12 dB SINAD sensitivity is a measure of the
smallest typical signal that has usable strength and that
produces an audio output signal of acceptable quality. The
method takes into account the effects of distortion within the
receiver; therefore, it can be a more meaningful measure of
sensitivity than Quieting Sensitivity for real-world receivers.
54
4.1.5.3. METHOD
The metJiod uses a frequency modulated signal generator and

an audio distortion analyzer as shown in figure 4.1.5. The signal
generator supplies a known input voltage to the receiver at the
measurement frequency. The distortion analyzer measures the power
in the audio output from the receiver under two conditions; viz.,
(a) with the 1000 Hz modulating signal present, and (b) with the
1000 Hz modulating signal filtered from the audio output power.

The generator level is adjusted to the open circuit output voltage
that causes the ratio of (a) to (b), above, expressed in decibels,
to be 12 dB . This voltage is the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity of the
receiver.

1. Signal generator capable of frequency modulation
4.1.5.5. PROCEDURE

NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance, to ,

generator output impedance equals no matching network is
,
required.
55
I
o
I— CC
I o q:
I— o I— UJ
I
cC I— (- M
q: >•
I— I—
I o _J
s: 00
UJ
UJ ai >i
-p
-H
>
-H
+J
-H
W
CD
CO
Q
g
o H
UJ W
o I—
UJ z
-P
UJ Q)
C_J CJ3
ZZ CO
cC q:
•--1
+J
Q n: o
UJ O 3
03
(D
Q- (—1— EH
s: <: UJ
•-H s: 2:
in
•H
0
_i 1—
Cm
•a:<
UJ
l-H
1/1
GE
56
2. Connect the TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance
equal to the specified load resistance, R,^ , and a power rating
in excess of the receiver's rated audio output power level, to
the audio output port of the receiver. Connect the audio
DISTORTION ANALYZER across this resistor.

4. Set receiver controls as given in Table VIII.

6. Adjust the frequency modulation in the signal generator

to ±60% of rated system deviation at 1000 Hz.
7. Set the signal generator output to 1000 microvolts.
8. Adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce rated

audio output
^ power,
^
P . This is P, .
o (s+n+d)
,
,
Adjust the distortion analyzer so that the 1000 Hz

9.
rejection filter tunes out the 1000 Hz modulation from the
signal generator.
10. Measure the noise plus distortion output power, P

^^^^.^^^
11. Calculate SINAD, in decibels, from the equation

P
°
SINAD (dB) = 10 log
^(n+d)
12. If SINAD calculated in Step 11 is greater (or less)

than 12 dB , decrease (or increase) the signal generator output
by 3 dB or smaller and repeat Steps 8 through 11. Continue this
procedure until 12 dB SINAD is obtained.
57
TABLE VIII
12 dB SINAD Sensitivity (FM)
Control Setting
4 . RF Gain 4. Maximum
8. Detector Mode 8. FM
14 . Squelch Level 14 . OFF
58
. .
Note: If 12 dB SINAD cannot be reached by INCREASING

the signal generator output, the receiver is
probably distortion-limited. In this case, an
alternate reference SINAD such as 6 dB may be
used

microvolts, at the OUTPUT TERMINALS of the matching network, if
used? otherwise, at the output terminals of the generator. This
is the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY of the receiver at frequency f^.

megahertz

3. Record the value of termination resistance, R^^ , in

ohms, connected to receiver audio output terminals.
4. Record the reference output power, P^, in watts.
6. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E^ , in

microvolts, at the output terminals of the matching network,
if used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the generator.
is the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity of the receiver.
59
1. Uncertainty, AE .
, in the measured value of E.
1 1
2. Uncertainty, AP , in the measured value of P

o o
3. Uncertainty, AP , , in the measured value of P ,

n+d
The total relative uncertainty, AE^(%), in the 12 dB SINAD
equation
AE
The uncertainty, AE^^, is obtained from the manufacturer's

generator. Uncertainties AP and AP are obtained from the
,
^ o n+d ,
60
.
4.1.6. NOISE FACTOR
4.1.6.1. DEFINITION
Receiver noise factor (noise figure) , F, is the ratio of

(a) signal-to-noise power ratio, S^/N^ , at the antenna terminals
to (b) signal-to-noise ratio, S^/N^, at the output terminals of
the receiver, when the input termination is at standard temperature
(290K)
S./N.
^ " s"7n~
o o
This definition is an adaptation of the IEEE definition of Average

Noise Factor for the particular case of surveillance receivers.
Noise factor is usually expressed in decibels; that is,
F(dB) = 10 log F.
4.1.6.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of the following measurement methods is to measure

the average noise factor of AM and FM receivers. Noise factor is
a measure of the amount of noise power added to a signal by the
receiver, thereby degrading the signal quality.
Four methods of measurement are given, and the method used will
depend upon the test equipment available, the desired accuracy, and
the time available to devote to the measurement. Noise figure is
usually measured only for the linear parts of the receiver that
precede the demodulatot For CW and AM receivers, this includes the
.
RF and IF stages up to the second detector. For FM receivers, this

includes the RF and IF stages up to the first limiter stage. For
receivers with a linear demodulator, such as a product detector,
noise figure may be measured for the entire receiver from the
antenna input terminals to the audio output terminals.
61
4.1.6.3. METHOD - AUTOMATIC NOISE FIGURE METER
This method uses an automatic noise figure meter (ANFM)

which includes a switched random noise generator, as shown in
figure 4.1.6.1. The ANFM cyclically switches the noise genera-
tor between two output power levels, and automatically computes
noise figure from the output signal of the receiver. The mea-
sured noise figure is displayed by the panel meter on the ANFM.
Measurement uncertainties as small as 0.3 dB are possible

under best conditions, and range from approximately 0.5 dB to
1.5 dB under typical conditions. The method uses equipment that
is commonly available for use above 30 MHz, limited availability
between 10 and 30 MHz, but unavailable below 10 MHz. It is
typically quick and convenient to perform, and is especially
convenient when making adjustments to optimize receiver noise
figure
4.1.6.3.1. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. Automatic noise figure meter (ANFM)
2 . Noise generator for use with the ANFM
3. Input impedance matching transformer
4.1.6.3.2. PROCEDURE

of the NOISE GENERATOR through an IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER that
provides the specified source impedance, Z^, to the receiver at
the measurement frequency, f^ . If the noise generator output
impedance equals Z , no transformer is needed.
62
1 H
I
(_J ZD
I— CD
I
03
I— I— q; I
O
cc U. LlI
s: I—
O LU UJ
oo
-p
I— s:
I—
ct O
u
o
UJ o o
n3
fa
LU
QJ
w
•H
o
IS
>^
o
i C3
x:
LU LU
o I
O cs
2:
s:
CSL
-M
<U
ct
Q
1—
n:
0
Ll_
00
CO
LU 000 -P
cn
O- [— IS
s: <t.
o
—
1 CtL
1—
0£.
LU I—
o
01
OO <C
O LU Cm
CD
63
. . .
2. Connect the input port of the ANFM to the output of th

last linear IF amplifier stage. Follow the instructions of th
manufacturer of the ANFM to make this connection.
3. Set receiver controls as given in Table IX.
Note: For some receivers, maximum RF/IF gain may

produce overloading either in the latter IF
stages or in the amplifier of the ANFM. In
this case, set the RF/IF gain to produce an
input level to the ANFM that is from 3 dB to
10 dB greater than the minimum level required
by the ANFM.
4. Tune the receiver to the measurement frequency, f^
5. Adjust the ANFM according to manufacturer's instruc-

tions This usually includes a calibration adjustment, a mode
selection, and selection of scale range.
6. Measure noise factor, F, in decibels, by following the

procedure given by the manufacturer.
7. Correct the measured value of F as instructed by the

manufacturer. Also correct the results for the effect of the
impedance transformer, if used. This is the noise factor, in
decibels, of the linear portions of the receiver RF/IF stages
when tuned to frequency f^
4.1.6.3.3. DATA REQUIRED
1. Record the measurement frequency, f^ , in kilohertz

or megahertz.
2. Record the value of source impedance, Z^, in ohms,

connected to the receiver input port.
3. Record the measured value of F, in decibels.

TABLE IX
Noise Factor, ANFM Method
Control Setting
2 . Frequency Tuning 2. As desired
5 . IF Gain 5. As required
6 . AF Gain 6 . N.A.
7 . Line Gain 7 . N. A.
8 . Detector Mode 8. N.A.
12. AF Bandwidth 12 . N.A.
13. Noise Limiter 13 . OFF
14 . Squelch Level 14 . N.A.

16 . Meter Switch 16 . N.A.
65
4.Record the Corrections applied to the measured value of
F. These include the following:
a. Noise generator termination temperature
b. VSWR
c. Impedance transformer loss
d. Cable loss
e. Image response
4.1.6.3.4. MEASUREMENT ERRORS
1. Uncertainty, AT , in the noise temperature, T, , of the

noise generator
2. Uncertainty, AT , of the ambient temperature, T , of

a a
the generator termination
3. Uncertainty, AF^, in F due to the VSWR of the generator

impedance
4. Uncertainty, AF^, in F due to image response
5.Uncertainty, ^^q' ^ ^® uncertainty in the

ANFM calibration
The total uncertainty, AF, in the measured value of F will

vary according to the particular ANFM system used. Refer to the
manufacturer's operating manual for the procedure for determining
AF.
66
.
4.1.6.4. METHOD - Y-FACTOR/POWER METER
This method uses a pair of random noise generators and a

power meter as shown in figure 4.1.6.2. The hot and cold noise
generators supply known input noise powers to the receiver in
a band of frequencies which includes that to which the receiver
is tuned. The power meter measures the power levels from the last
linear IF stage. The ratio of the two power levels corresponding
to the two input power levels is the Y-f actor. Noise factor is
computed from the measured Y-factor and the known power levels of
the two generators

1 dB under typical conditions. The method uses sophisticated
equipment, but it is commonly available.
1. Hot random noise generator
2. Cold random noise generator
4 . Power meter

port of the HOT NOISE GENERATOR through an IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER
that provides the specified source impedance, to the receiver ,
at the measurement frequency, f^ . If the noise generator output

67
( 1
2
J
4-*
t
n\
q: o
LU LU +-'
I— CD
O
Q-
LU
*-<
H
35
n
\
f-4
1 1
U
4-'
r\
< >
/r<
Li- 1— fO
ce: 1—
LU o r
>
1—
?H
LU
O
LU
1—
S
u
0
q: cc -p
r>
o \J
fri
10
Ft.
t\\
(U
"H
vj
q: 3
|_|_|
^ô sen
o
m0
< 1o •-
Q n: Li_
n.
LU 00
C_>
Q. 1— Z
s: ct cc r
-p
\— (U
-p
tn
J\
1
eg
en
0
LU t—
1—
0 0 LU
(—1 cn.
LU
CD
-r-f
68
2.Connect the input port of the POWER METER to the output
of the last linear IF amplifier stage.
3. Set receiver controls as given in Table X.

produce overloading in the latter IF stages.
In this case, set the controls to produce
maximum RF gain without overload anywhere in
the measurement system.
4. Tune the receiver to the measurement frequency, f^.
5. i«leasure the output power, P^^, from the last linear IF

amplifier stage.
6. Disconnect the hot noise generator and connect the

COLD NOISE GENERATOR in its place.
7. I4easure the output power, P^, from the last linear IF

amplifier stage.
8. Calculate the Y-f actor from the equation
i
p
c
9. Calculate the noise factor from the equation
T^ - YT
F = ^ + 1
290 CY-1)
and
F (dB) = 10 log F
This is the noise factor, in decibels, of the linear portions
of the receiver RF/IF stages when tuned to frequency f ^
69
.
TABLE X
Noise Factor, Y-Factor/Power Meter Method
Control Setting
4 . RF Gain , 4. Maximum
5. IF Gain 5 . As required
6 . AF Gain 6 . N. A.
7. Line Gain 7. N.A.
8 . Detector Mode 8 . N. A.
9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9 OFF
10 . BFO Frequency :
10 . N.A.
12 . AF Bandwidth 12 . N.A.
14 . Squelch Level 14 . N.A.
70

megahertz

3. Record the noise temperature, T^^ , in kelvins, of the

hot noise generator.
4. Record the noise temperature, T^, in kelvins, of

the cold noise generator.
5. Record the output power, P^^ , in milliwatts.
6. Record the output power, , in milliwatts.
7. Record the calculated Y-f actor, Y.
8. Record the calculated value of noise factor, F, in

decibels
1. Uncertainty, noise temperature, T^^ , of the

^'î^'
hot noise generator
2. Uncertainty, AT^, in the noise temperature, T^ , of the

cold noise generator
3. Uncertainty, ^'^^^r the measured value of P^^
4. Uncertainty,
^
AP , in the measured value of P
c c
71
The total uncertainty, AF , in the calculated value of F
is given by the equation
AF = Ci AT, + C2 AT + C3 AY.
h c
The uncertainty coefficients Ci, C2 , and C3 are given by the

equations
1
Ci =
290 (Y - 1)
-Y
C2 = -
290 (Y 1)
and
T
c - \
290 (Y - 1)
The uncertainties AT, and AT are obtained from the manufac-

h c
turer ' s specifications or from the results of calibrating T^
and T^ . Uncertainty AY is given by the relation
AY = AP, +AP
h c
where AP^ and AP^ are obtained from the manufacturer's speci-
fications on the power meter.
The relative measurement uncertainty, AF(dB) , expressed in

decibels, is given approximately, for small uncertainties, by
the equation
AF (dB) = 10 log ( 1 + ^
72
.
4.1.6.5. METHOD - Y-FACTOR/ATTENUATOR
This method uses a pair of random noise generators and a

variable attenuator as shown in figure 4.1.6.3. The hot and cold
noise generators supply known input powers to the receiver in a
band of frequencies which includes that to which the receiver
is tuned. The attenuator measures the ratio of the two receiver
output power levels corresponding to the two input power levels
from the generators. Noise factor is computed from the measured
power ratio and the known generator power levels

1 dB under typical conditions. The method uses sophisticated
equipment, but it is commonly available.
1. Hot random noise generator
2 . Cold random noise generator

s
4. Variable attenuator
5. Signal level indicator (voltmeter, power meter,

receiver, etc.)
Connect the input port of the receiver to the output

1.
port of the COLD NOISE GENERATOR through an IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER
that provides the specified source impedance, to the receiver
,
at the measurement frequency, f ^ If the noise generator output

.
73
I I
— -J 1—
O
1
<: UJ <:
Z> CJ
CO UJ •— O
I— _J Q
Z
1
00 :5
u
o
+>
to
:3
c
(U
a: +>
O +J
<:
\u
o
4J
<: I— O
Cm
I
o
-p
o
ta
ER
O
>
—
1
LlJ w
•rH
EC AN
o
Q
s
u
o
Dj
+>
(U
c_) CD s: CO
2: z q:
< o l-H +1
Q =C Li_ (0
UJ O t/) (D
Q. h- Z Eh
2: <C cC
i-H s: ci;
-H
74
2. Connect the SIGNAL LEVEL INDICATOR to the output of the
last linear IF amplifier stage through the VARIABLE ATTENUATOR.
3. Set receiver controls as given in Table XI.

produce overloading in the latter IF stages.
4. Tune the receiver to the measurement frequency, f^.
5. Adjust the attenuator and the sensitivity of the signal

level indicator to produce a convenient indicator reading near
full scale.
6. Record the indicator reading, I .

c
7. Record the attenuator setting, A^(dB) , in decibels.
8. Disconnect the cold noise generator and connect the

HOT NOISE GENERATOR in its place.
9. Adjust the attenuator to produce the indicator

reading, I .
c
10. Record the new attenuator setting, A^(dB) , in decibels.
11. Compute the Y-f actor in decibels from the equation
Y (dB) = A (dB) - A, (dB) .

c
12. Convert the Y-f actor in decibels to Y-f actor by the

equation
Y = antilog
75
TABLE XI
Noise Factor, Y-Factor/Attenuator Method
Control Setting
5. IF Gain 5 . As required
6 . AF Gain 6 . N. A.
7. Line Gain 7. N.A.
8. Detector Mode 8 . N.A.
14. Squelch Level 14 . N.A.
15 . AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . MGC
76
.
13. Calculate the noise factor from the equation
T, - YT
F = Jl ^ + 1
^ '
290 (Y-1)
and
F (dB) = 10 log F .
This is the noise factor, in decibels, of the linear portions

of the receiver RF/IF stages when tuned to frequency f^.

megahertz.

3. Record the noise temperature, T^ , in kelvins , of the

hot noise generator.
4. Record the noise temperature, T^ , in kelvins, of the

cold noise generator.
5. Record the indicator reading, I^, in millivolts or

milliwatts
6. Record the attenuator setting, A^ (dB) , in decibels.
7. Record the attenuator setting, A^^ (dB) , in decibels.
8. Record the Y-f actor, Y(dB) , in decibels.
9. Record the numeric Y-f actor, Y.
10. Record the calculated value of noise factor, F,

in decibels.
77
.
1. Uncertainty, AT^ , in the noise temperature, T^^, of the

hot noise generator
2. Uncertainty, AT^ , in the noise temperature, T^ , of the

cold noise generator
3. Uncertainty, AA , in the measured value of A (dB)

c c
4. Uncertainty, AA^,^ , in the measured value of Aj^(dB)
The total uncertainty, AF , in the calculated value of F

AF = Ci AT, + Ca AT + C 3 AY
h c
The uncertainty coefficients Ci, C2 , and C3 are given by

the equations
1
290 (Y-1)
-Y
C2 =
290 (Y-1)
and
T
c
290 (Y-1)
The uncertainties AT, and AT are obtained from the manufac-

h c
turer's specifications or from the results of calibrating T^
and T^. Uncertainty AY is given by the relation
AA (dB) + AA (dB)
AY = antilog — 10
78
where Aa and AA, are obtained from the manufacturer's
c h
specifications on the variable attenuator.
The relative measurement uncertainty, AF(dB) , expressed in

decibels, is given approximately, for small uncertainties, by
the equation
AF (dB) = 10 log ^1 + .
79
.
4.1.6.6. METHOD - 3 DB
This method uses a temperature-limited diode (TLD) noise

generator and a 3dB attenuator (hence its name) as shown in
figure 4.1.6.4. The TLD noise generator supplies a known but
adjustable input power to the receiver in a band of frequencies
which includes that to which the receiver is tuned. The signal
level indicator is used to indicate a reference level of output
power
With the noise generator output level adjusted to zero, and

with the 3dB attenuator out of the system, the receiver output
power produces an indication on the signal level indicator. Then
the 3 dB attenuator is inserted in the system, and the noise
generator output is increased until the same indicator reading
is obtained. Noise factor is read directly from the calibrated
meter on the TLD noise generator.

1.5 dB under typical conditions, The method uses commonly
available test equipment, and is quick and convenient to perform.
]_ ^
Temperature-limited diode noise generator
3 . 3 dB fixed attenuator
4. Signal level indicator (voltmeter, power meter,

receiver, etc.)
80
1 — 11 1
o
1 — 1
1
UJ cC
>O
—
CD LlJ 1
I— _I Q
CO
1—
^3
O
o +)
I— <D
-a ID
CO LU
O
-P
U
(«
P4
cn
•H
O
o I—
Z
!^
O
LU M-f
+>
i (1)
CO
+)
w
o CD 1
UJ s: oo :
H- — — 1
0
> 1
_1
2:
81
.
1. Connect the input port of the receiver to the output por

of the NOISE GENERATOR through an IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER that
provides the specified source impedance, , to the receiver at
the measurement frequency, f^ . If the noise generator output
impedance equals , no transformer is needed.
2. Connect the input port of the SIGNAL LEVEL INDICATOR

to the output of the last linear IF amplifier stage.
3. Set receiver controls as given in Table XII.

produce overloading in the latter IF stages
5. Turn the emission current of the TLD noise generator to

zero (leave the generator connected to tlie measurement system).
6. Adjust the sensitivity of the signal level indicator to

produce a reading near full scale.
7. Record the indicator reading, I.
8. Disconnect the receiver from the signal level indicator.
9. Insert the 3 dB ATTENUATOR between the receiver and the

signal level indicator.
Note: Make certain that the attenuator terminating

impedances are proper so that 3 dB of attenuation
is obtained.
82
. .
TABLE XII
Noise Factor, 3 dB Method
Control Setting
1. Band Switch 1 As desired
2. Frequency Tuning 2 As desired
3. Antenna Trimmer 3 Peak
4. RF Gain 4 . -4 ax i mum
5. IF Gain rr
D . As required
6 . AF Gain b . N.A
7 . Line Gain 7 . N A .
8. Detector Mode o
o . N A .
11. IF Bandwidth 11 As desired
12. AF Bandwidth 12. N. A.
14 . Squelch Level 14. N. A.
16 . Meter Switch 16 . N. A.
83
. . . ,
10. Increase the emission current of the TLD noise generator

to produce the indicator reading, I.
11. Record the indicated value of noise factor in decibels

as read from the emission current meter on the TLD noise generator.
12. Apply a frequency correction to the indicated value of

F(dB), if necessary as described in the manufacturer's operating
manual, to provide a corrected value of F(dB). Also, correct
F(dB) for the effect of ambient temperature within the noise
generator as instructed by the manufacturer. This is the noise
factor, in decibels, of the linear portions of the receiver RF/IF
stages when tuned to frequency f^

or megahertz.

3. Record the indicator reading, I, in millivolts or

milliwatts
4. Record the indicated value of noise factor, F(dB)

in decibels
5. Record the frequency-corrected and temperature-corrected

value of noise factor, F(dB), in decibels.
The principal source of measurement error is the calibration

of the TLD noise generator meter. The uncertainty, AF(dB) , in
decibels in the measured value of F will vary according to the
particular noise generator used. Refer to the manufacturer's
operating manual for the procedure for determining AF.
84
.
4.2. SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO
4.2.1. DEFINITION
Signal-to-noise ratio is the ratio of the signal power

to the noise power in the entire output pass band. This ratio
is usually expressed in decibels.
4.2.2. PURPOSE

signal-to-noise ratio of the audio output signal from a sur-
veillance receiver. Signal-to-noise ratio is a measure of
the quality of the receiver's output signal. It will vary with
the amount of internal noise in the receiver, with the amount
of input signal to the receiver, and with the signal-to-noise
ratio of the input signal. It may also be a function of
receiver sensitivity, selectivity, and distortion.
4.2.3. METHOD
The method uses a power meter or true rms voltmeter as shown

in figure 4.2. The power meter or voltmeter measures the output
signal level, P^ , when the signal source is turned off (receiver
output is noise only) , and Pg^^^/ when the signal source is turned
on (receiver output is signal plus noise) . The signal-to-noise
ratio is calculated from these two quantities by the equation
S/N = ^ n
- 1 .

under best conditions , and range from approximately 0.3 dB to
0.8 dB under typical conditions, The method uses rudimentary
and commonly available test equi ment
85
1 1
o
1—
OH
UJ
o
•H
1- o »— +J
<C 1— UJ LU UJ
1—< —
s:
O 3 1—
O UJ
1
h—
s: oo _i O-21 
m
•H
t— O
O
-P
t I
iH
aJ
1 tr»
-H
W
UJ o O
a,
UJ z I
4->
o 0)
W
+J
ca
0)
Eh
-H
86
.
4.2.4. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. Termination resistor for receiver output port
2a. AF power meter
OR,
2b. True RMS voltmeter
4.2.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the signal source to the receiver input port.

Select whatever matching means that will give the desired
operating conditions.
2. Adjust the receiver according to the desired operating

conditions (see Table XIII).
3. With the signal source output set to zero, measure the

output power, P^ , from the receiver. This will be noise power
only
4. Adjust the output signal from the source according to

the desired output level and frequency.
5. Measure the output

^ power, from the receiver.
P ,
s+n ,
This will be both signal and noise power.
6. Calculate the ratio, S/N, by the equation
S/N - 1 .
This is the signal-to-noise ratio of the receiver output

signal under the chosen operating conditions.
87
TABLE XIII
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Control Setting
1
X • DdllU. OW_L Ut^ll X .
C? T V
^ • r xt;ûtiiiL»y J. LiiiJ-iiy ^ .
/S ^0 T V* ^
-> 5 Q C? 1
o •
/Zi
4 "i n 4 Lit: QX
0 T~ 0
n X titj.
5 TF "i n 5 H
La ti QX
0 yc
1 X 0 LI
r1
xlX Vjj Ci -I- i. 1 Ac; Lie. 0 X X C LL
7 . Ti
J J np
1 11 GiPi 1
\_J C-L -X. n1
J. 7 . As rl 0 n
-1- X
T"f=^ r{
LA
8 . 8 . Ac; H
Lie 0
c!
XX C LI
v-iCi r1
-j
Q j_>c;ctL. Vf^ m o Ti (^\7 Oq

F Xts^Lltiilv^y 1 1 "1
1
o
— —Ld L.^X
1 "h T* Q ("1
Lie: c; X
0 1 X
Y" r\
LI
1 n 0
RF W
JUJ. In*
IT
rî^mif^^n
X CS^J LlC-i i v^_y 1 0 Ac; rl p»
Lit- QX
0 y 0 Ll
1 X
12 . AF Bandwidth 12 . As desired
13. Noise Limiter 13. As desired
14. Squelch Level 14 . As desired
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. As desired
88
4.2.6. DATA REQUIRED
1.Record all receiver operating parameters selected for

the test. These include the following:
a. Gain control settings

b. Frequency setting
c. Bandwidth
d. Noise limiter setting
e . AGC mode
g. Settings of any other pertinent controls
2 . Record all signal source parameters selected for the

test. These include the following:
a. Frequency
b. Output level
c . Modulation type
d. Modulation frequency
e. Modulation percentage/deviation
f. Source impedance
g. Signal level at receiver input port
3. Record P , in watts
n
4. Record P , in watts
s+n ,
5. Record calculated value of S/N
4.2.7. MEASUREMENT ERRORS
The principal source of measurement error is the uncertainty,

AP, in the reading of the AF power meter, or AE in the reading
89
. ,
of the true rms voltmeter. The total uncertainty, AS/N (dB)

in decibels, in the calculated value of S/N, is given approxi-
mately, for small uncertainties, by the equations
AS/N (dB) = 10 log I 1 + 1 ,
or
AS/N (dB) = 10 log ( 1 + •
^
The uncertainties AP and/or AE are obtained from the

manufacturer's specifications on the power meter or voltmeter,
respectively
90
:
4.3. GAIN
Gain is a general term used to denote an increase in signal

level in transmission from one point to another. This section
provides measurement methods for the following receiver gain
parameters
1. Power Gain
2. Dynamic Range
3. Automatic Gain Control Characteristics
4.3.1. POWER GAIN

4.3.1.1. DEFINITION
The power gain of a receiver is the ratio, in decibels, of

(a) the audio power delivered to the receiver's specified output
termination at a 12 dB SINAD to (b) the available signal power
from the source connected to the receiver's input terminals.
4.3.1.2. PURPOSE

power gain of a receiver. Power gain is a measure of the
receiver's ability to convert the power of a small modulated
radio frequency signal into a usable audio output signal of
acceptable quality.
4.3.1.3. METHOD
The method is as follows (see figure 4.3.1): The 12 dB

SINAD sensitivity of the receiver is measured; the signal source
impedance is determined; the available input signal power is
calculated; then the power gain is calculated as the ratio, in
decibels, of (1) the rated audio output power and, (2) the
available input signal power.
91
I
o
I— o q:
oc
o
<
\— »— LU
I
I— t-^
ai >-
I — 1 I— o _i
2: oo h- <:
Od UJ
i-i cc
Q
cc I— q;
I
Q 3= o
LU O 3
Q- I— I—
s: <: LU
—1 1—
o
<: «a:
CD LU
(—12:
00 LU
92
1.5 dB under typical conditions. The method uses moderately
sophisticated but commonly available test equipment.
1. Signal generator capable of amplitude or frequency

modulation
5 . Impedance bridge or vector impedance meter
4.3.1.5. PROCEDURE

NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance, to the ,
receiver at the measurement frequency, f^ . If the signal

generator output impedance equals Z^, no matching network is
required.

equal to the specified load resistance, R,^, and a power rating
3. Set receiver controls as given in Table XIV.
9 3
TABLE XIV
Power Gain
^
Control Setting
5. IF Gain 5 . Maximum
6 . AF Gain 6 . Maximum
8. Detector _4ode 8 . Aid, FM as
10 . BFO Frequency 10 . N .A.
12 . AF Bandwidth '.
12 . As desired
13 . Noise Limiter 13 . OFF
16. i4eter Switch 16 . Optional
94
. .
4. Measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY as outlined in

Section 4.1.3. for AM receivers, or Section 4.1.5. for
FM receivers.
5. Measure the output

^ IMPEDANCE, Z = R + j X , of the
s s s
source at the terminals that connect to the input terminals
of the receiver. See Section 4.10.
6. Calculate the power, P , available from the source,

a
by the equation
E .
2 R
^ =
P = '
a (R 2 + X ^)
where E. is the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY.

1
7. Calculate the power ratio, G, in decibels, by the

equation
15 P
G(dB) = 10 log .
Y6-p^
a
The fraction, 15/16, is the fractional part of P^ that is the

audio output signal due to the input signal (the remaining 1/16
is noise power). G(dB) is the power gain of the receiver at
frequency f^

megahertz

3. Record the value of termination resistance, R^, in ohms

4. Record the reference output power, P^ , in watts.

,
6. Record the open circuit signal voltage, , in micro-

volts, at the output terminals of the matching network, if
is the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity of the receiver.
7. Record the measured value of Z , in ohms.

s
8. Record the calculated value of P , in microwatts.

a
9. Record the calculated value of G, in decibels. G is

the gain of the receiver.
The principal sources of measurement errors are the

following:
2. Uncertainty, ^^^r the measured value of P^
3. Uncertainty, AP in the measured value of P

n+d n+d
,
4. Uncertainty, AR^ , in the measured value of R^ , and

Ax , in the measured value of X
s s
The total relative uncertainty, AG(dB) , in decibels, in

the gain G, is given approximately, for small uncertainties,
by the equation
AG (dB) = 10 log
where AP AP
AG _ o a
G P P
o a
and
15 P
o
G =
16 P
a
96
The uncertainty, AP , is obtained from the manufacturer'
^ o
specifications on the distortion analyzer. The relative
uncertainty, AP /P , in P , is obtained from the equation
AP AE. (R ^-X ^) AR 2X ^ AX
a 2 i + s s s _|_
s s
P
a
E.
i
(R ^+X
ss ^) R
s
(R
s
^ +X
s
^) X
s
The uncertainty AE^ is obtained from the manufacturer's

specifications on the output level indicator of the signal
generator.
^
The uncertainties AR and AX are obtained from
s s
the manufacturer's specifications on the impedance bridge
or meter.
97
4.3.2. DYNZVMIC RANGE
a. Dynamic range is t±ie difference, in decibels, between

the overload level and the minimum acceptable signal level in
a system or transducer. NOTE: The minimum acceptable signal
level of a system or transducer is ordinarily fixed by one or
more of the following: Noise level, low-level distortion,
interference, or resolution level. (IEEE Std 100-1972)
b. Overload level is that level above which operation

ceases to be satisfactory as a result of signal distortion,
overheating, or damage. (IEEE Std 100-1972)
4.3.2.2. PURPOSE

dynamic range of a receiver. Dynamic range is a measure of the
ability of a receiver to receive a signal of arbitrary strength
with acceptable quality.
4.3.2.3. METHOD FOR AM RECEIVERS WITHOUT AGC
This method uses an amplitude modulated signal generator, a

variable attenuator, and a true RMS voltmeter or power meter as
shown in figure 4.3.2.1. The signal generator supplies a known input
voltage to the receiver at the measurement frequency. The variable
attenuator temporarily replaces the AF gain control, and adjusts
the audio output level. The voltmeter or power meter measures
the audio output power.
98
1
o
1— LlJ
cr:
O
1
1— 1—
et 1— UJ LU LU
Z. 00 s: 3 LU
1—
t—H t— (— o O
a.
s: oo _i s:
UJ o
> U
O
1
. 1
0)
1 in
u
•H
g
"J- I- A
1^ LiJ O Q
>
I—
I— < O
q: X
CO ca; U
I =a;
O
LU o I— m
<_) z "
q; LU
UJ u. o cC 1—
-p
0)
+J
Q)
O CJ3
cc H-i a:
Q ic o
LU o 3
D. I— h-
s: ct LU
o
—I I—
C3 LU
•— z: I
</) LU
99
The lower end of the dynamic range is obtained by determining
the input signal voltage that produces a 6 dB output S/N ratio
at the reference output power. The upper end is obtained by deter-
mining the signal voltage that produces 1 dB compression at refer-
ence output power.
X
This method does not take into account the distortion produced
in the receiver under conditions of large input signal power. It
uses conventional and commonly available test equipment. Measure-
ment uncertainties as small as 0.3 dB are possible under best condi-
tions, and range from approximately 0.4 dB to 3 dB under typical
conditions.
2 . Input impedance matching network
4 . Variable AF attenuator
5a. AF power meter
OR,

,

impedance equals Z , no matching network is required.
100
. .
2. Disconnect the output lead from the receiver AF gain control

(slider contact) Insert the variable AF attenuator between the
.
open gain control output terminal and the lead that went to that
terminal
Note : If the resulting input and output terminations to

the AF attenuator present a severe mismatch to the
attenuator so as to change its calibration, match
the attenuator into the circuit with transformers
or resistive matching networks.

to the specified load resistance, R^, and a power rating in excess
output port of the receiver. Connect the TRUE RI4S VOLTMETER across
this resistor.
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R^, to the audio output port of
the receiver.
4a. Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate the rated output

ower, . The voltage to be measured is given by the equation
E = x/P R„ .
o > o £
OR,

output power, P^.
5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XV.
Tune the signal generator and the receiver to the measurement

frequency, f^
101
TABLE XV
Dynamic Range (MGC)
Control Setting
5. IF Gain 5. Maximum
6. AF Gain 6. Maximum
9. Beat Frequency Oscillator 9 . OFF
12. AF Bandwidth 12 . As desired
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . MGC
102
. .
7. Adjust the amplitude modulation m the signal generator

to 30% at 1000 Hz.
8. With the signal generator output at zero, adjust the

variable attenuator to produce 20% of reference output power,
P^. This power is entirely noise.
9. Increase the signal generator output to produce reference

output power, P^. This power is approximately 20% noise and 80%
signal, giving a 6 dB S/N ratio.
10. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^, in

microvolts, at the OUTPUT TERMINALS of the matching network,
This is the lower voltage level of the dynamic range.
11. Increase the variable attenuator setting by exactly

20 dB. This reduces the output power to approximately 0.01 P^.
12. Increase the signal generator output to produce

13. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^^ , at the

output terminals of the matching network (or generator)
14. Calculate the quantity Ri , in decibels, where
E
Ri = 20 log .
15. With the generator set as in Step 12, again increase

the variable attenuator setting by exactly 20 dB. This reduces
the output power to approximately 0.01 P^.
16. Again increase the signal generator output to produce

103
. .
17. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, , at

the output terminals of the matching transformer (or generator)
18. Calculate the quantity, / in decibels, where
. E .
t R2 = 20 log .
• '
îi
Proceed as indicated in Steps 11 through 18, each time

19.
changing the variable attenuator setting by 20 dB and increasing ,
the signal generator output to successively higher levels to pro-

duce reference output power, until the computed value of R
exceeds 21 dB for the first time. (All preceding values of R
are less than 21 dB. 21 dB represents a compression of 1 dB
in the gain of the receiver.)
20. Return the variable attenuator setting to the value

that immediately preceded the final value reached in Step 19.
21. Decrease the signal generator output to again produce

reference output power with the attenuator set as in Step 20.

10 dB. This reduces the output power to approximately 0.1 P^.
23. Increase the signal generator output to produce

24. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E

j ^ , at the
output terminals of the matching network (or generator)
25. Reduce the signal generator output by approximately

20 dB.

20 dB . This may increase the output power to approximately P .
104
. . . .
27. Adjust the signal generator output to produce

28. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, Ej^, at

the output terminals of the matching network (or generator)
Ej^ corresponds to an attenuator setting that is an increase
of 20 dB from the setting in Step 24.
29. Calculate the quantity, Rj , in decibels, where
E .
R. = 20 log
30a. If Rj is greater than 21 dB , return to Step 20 and

proceed through Step 29 except use a smaller attenuation
change in Step 22; e.g., use 8 dB instead of 10 dB
31a. Repeat Step 30a (i.e.. Steps 20 through 29) until

values for E- and E. are found for which R. = 21 dB
J 1 D 2 3
OR,
30b. If Rj in Step 29 is less than 21 dB , return to Step

20 and proceed through Step 29 except use a larger attenuation
change in Step 22; e.g. , use 12 dB instead of 10 dB
31b. Repeat Step 30b until values for E-

found for which Rj = 21 dB.
3 13 and E.
2
are
32. Determine the signal voltage, E^ = Ej ^ , in microvolts.

This is the upper voltage level of the dynamic range.
33. Compute the ratio R^ in decibels, where
= 20 log
^ .
R^ is the dynamic range, in decibels, for the receiver.
105
. .

megahertz
2. Record the value of source impedance, Z , in ohms,

s
3. Record the value of termination resistance, R^, in

ohms, connected to receiver output terminals.
4a. Record the output voltage, E^, in volts
OR,
4b. Record the reference output power, P^, in watts
5. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E^, in

microvolts
6. Record each attenuator setting, in decibels, taken

throughout the measurement procedure.
7. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E^, E^, or E^,

in microvolts, for each of the attenuator settings of 6, above.
8. Record the ratio R, in decibels, calculated for each

pair of voltages, E. and E., of Step 7 above.
9. Record the ratio, R,, in decibels.

d
The principal sources of measurement error are the followin
106
1. Uncertainty, AE^, in the measured value of E^^
2. Uncertainty, AE , in the measured value of E

u u

^ o o
OR,
o o
4. Uncertainty, AA(dB), in the variable attenuator

attenuation
The total relative uncertainty, AE^(dB), in decibels,

in the lower voltage level, E^, of the dynamic range, is given
approximately, for small uncertainties, by the equations
(AE 1 + +
AE
g '
o
OR
AE , AP
AE„(dB) = 20 log
' " {
\
1 + —J^
E
+
£
2 V
o /}
For the upper voltage level, AE^(dB), in decibels, is given

AE^(dB) = 20 log
/
^ 1 + ^ ^
AE
u
+
AE
o
+
1
i A|_
AA \
j ,
OR
/ AE , AP T
AE^(aB, = 20 log (l . +
I ^ ).
u o
where
AA - •
antilog
AA(dB) — 0
- 1 .
The uncertainties AE^ and AE^ are obtained from the

manufacturer's specifications on the output level indication
of the signal generator. Uncertainties AE^ , AP^, and AA(dB)
are obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on the rms
voltmeter, AF power meter, and variable attenuator, respectively
107
. . . ,
4.3.2.4. METHOD FOR AM RECEIVERS WITH AGC , OR FM

RECEIVERS WITH ONE OR MORE LIMITERS
The method uses a modulated signal generator and an audio

distortion analyzer as shown in figure 4.3.2.2. The signal
generator supplies a known input voltage to the receiver at
the measurement frequency. The distortion analyzer measures
the power (a) with the 1000 Hz modulating signal present, and
(b) with the 1000 Hz modulating signal filtered from the audio
output power
The lower end of the dynamic range is the 12 dB SINAD

sensitivity (cf) of the receiver. The upper end of the range
is established by determining the lowest of the following
three signal levels:
a. The signal voltage that produces a 12 dB SINAD ratio

near the receiver's overload level.
. b. The signal voltage that fires the receiver's overvoltage

protection circuit (if any)
c. The signal voltage that reaches the maximum safe level,

above which receiver damage occurs (given as a manufacturer's
specification)
The method takes into account the distortion produced in

the receiver, and hence provides meaningful information.
Measurement uncertainties as small as 0.4 dB are possible under
best conditions, and range from approximately 1 dB to 4 dB
depending upon circumstances. The method uses moderately
sophisticated but commonly available test equipment.
108
I
o
t-i ce: o q:
\— o —
I I LlJ
<t I— I—M
q: >-
I— I—
I o _J
2: 00 I—<
q; uJ
LU CSL
00 :z u
Q
LU o >1
Q
u
o
LlJ
o
I
-p
0)
w
w
(1)
^ 2:
et 1— q: 1
Q DC O
LU 3
C_) CN
CL. 1— I—
2: <=C LU CM
o::
—I I—
o
=a: <
2: q:
O LU
I— 2:
1
OO LU
109
.
modulation
'

NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance, Z^, to
required
2.Connect the TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance

equal to the specified load resistance, R^^, and a power rating
the output port of the receiver. Connect the audio DISTORTION
ANALYZER across this resistor.
3. Set receiver controls as given in Table XVI.
4.Measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY as outlined in

Section 4.1.3. for AM receivers, or Section 4.1.5. for FM
receivers. The 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY, in microvolts, is
the lower voltage level, E^, of the dynamic range.
5. Increase the generator output level to the vicinity

of the receiver's overload level until one of the following
conditions is reached, whichever occurs first:
110
TABLE XVI
Dynamic Range (AGC)
Control Setting
8. Detector Mode 8. AM, FM,as required
15 . AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . AGC as desired

111
.
a. 12 dB SINAD ratio is again obtained. The condition

sought is a DECREASE of SINAD ratio with an INCREASE of
input signal level, and vice versa.
b. The receiver's overvoltage protection circuit is fired.
c. The receiver's specified maximum safe input voltage

is reached.
6. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^ in

microvolts, at the output terminals of the matching transformer
(or generator). E^ is the upper voltage level of the dynamic
range
7. Compute the ratio R , in decibels, where
= 20 log
R^ is the dynamic range, in decibels, for the receiver.
112
: ,

or megahertz
2. Record the value of source impedance, , in ohms.


in ohms, connected to receiver output terminals.
4. Record the reference output power, P^, in watts
5. Record the output voltage, E^, in microvolts
6. Record the signal voltage, E^ , in microvolts
7. Record the ratio R , in decibels

d
-,

following
1. Uncertainty, AE^ , in the measured value of E,^
2. Uncertainty, AE^ , in the measured value of E^
4, Uncertainty, AP^ , in the measured value of
113
The total relative uncertainty, AE^(dB), in decibels,
in the lower voltage level, E^, of the dynamic range, is
given approximately, for small uncertainties, by the equations
(AE1 + +
AE
£ o ).
OR
AE^(dB) = 20 log f 1 + + -
2
— P
o /
I
/
.
•
For the upper voltage level, AE^ (dB) , in decibels, is given

(AE 1 + +
AE \
,
j
OR
(AE 1 + +
, AP \
"E^ ^ 1 .
u o /
The uncertainties AE^ and AE are obtained from the

£ u
manufacturer's specifications on the output level indication
of the signal
^
generator. Uncertainties AE or AP are
^ o o
obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on the rms
voltmeter or AF power meter, respectively.
114
4.3.3. AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL
Automatic gain control (AGC) is a process or means by which

GAIN is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a
function of input or other specified parameters (IEEE Std
100-1972). Of importance to receiver performance are the
static and dynamic AGC characteristics . The former includes
the effect of AGC voltage on system gain and its leveling
effect on output power. The latter includes the attack and
decay time constants of the AGC system.
4.3.3.1. STATIC AGC CHARACTERISTIC; SYSTEM GAIN VS.

AGC VOLTAGE
4.3.3.1.1. DEFINITION
Static AGC characteristic, system gain vs. AGC voltage,

is the functional relationship between the gain of the
AGC-controlled amplifier system and the AGC control voltage.
This characteristic includes all levels of AGC control from
a minimum, which may be zero or an offset from zero, to a
maximum, which is normally limited by the dynamic range (cf.)
of the receiver.
4.3.3.1.2. PURPOSE

static AGC characteristic, in terms of receiver gain as a
function of d.c. AGC voltage, for an AM receiver having an
AGC system. This characteristic is one measure of the degree
to which the AGC system is effective in controlling the gain
of the receiver. Effective AGC control usually enhances the
dynamic range of the receiver. The method ignores the means
by which AGC voltage is obtained.
115
4.3.3.1.3. METHOD
The method uses an amplitude modulated signal generator,

an audio distortion analyzer, and a source of variable d.c.
voltage as shown in figure 4.3.3.1. The signal generator
supplies a known input voltage to the receiver at the
measurement frequency. The variable d.c. voltage source
supplies a known AGC voltage that substitutes for the normal
internally generated AGC voltage. The distortion analyzer
measures the receiver output signal level. Gain, as a function
of AGC voltage, is computed from the known input signal level
and the measured output signal level.

typical conditions. The method uses rudimentary and commonly
5. Variable, voltage regulated d.c. power supply
6. Impedance bridge or vector impedance meter

I
(D
0>
o a: o en (0
i-i
I- o H-iLU
P
a: I- h- M o
t—t —
t
oc >-
O _J >
2: 00
cm LU
h- <: u
I-I cC
to
>
u_ I— CD
O I/)
o
eC ZD <a; CQ u
O A +j
c:
o
o
o
i -H
LU o I—
a: CD LU O
O
o X +J
g
o
+)
d
O
ZZ
CD
ii^
mO
ct I— q;
Q ni O
I
LU 3
c_)
I
Q- I— I— +j
S <C LU
+j
OT
<U
Eh
—
o
i I—
z q:
CD LU
I— zI
00 UJ
CD
Em
117

NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance, Z^,
to the receiver at the measurement frequency, f^. If the
signal generator output impedance equals Z^, no matching
network is required.

equal to the specified load resistance, R^ and a power rating
,

the output port of the receiver. Connect the audio DISTORTION
3. Break the line between the output of the AGC rectifier

and the AGC line (preceding point A as shown in figure 4.3.3.1.).
Note: If the receiver has delayed AGC, break the

line so as not to disrupt this function.
4. Connect the VARIABLE D.C. VOLTAGE SOURCE between point

A, figure 4.3.3.1., and ground. Observe correct polarity.
Note: Normally, correct polarity is with the negative

voltage applied to the AGC line and positive
voltage grounded.
5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XVII.

7. Adjust the amplitude modulation in the signal

generator to 30% at 1000 Hz.
118
.
TABLE XVII
Automatic Gain Control; Gain vs. AGC Voltage
Control Setting
2. Frequency Tuning 2 . As desired
6. AF Gain 6. As required

XT
10 . BFO Frequency 10 . N A
.
11. IF Bandv/idth 11. As desired
12. AF Bandv/idth 12 . As desired
15 . AGC/MGC iMode Switch 15. AGC
119
8. With the d.c. voltage set to zero, measure the POWER
GAIN, G(dB) , of the receiver as outlined in Steps 4 through 7,
Section 4.3.1.5.
9 . Increase the d.c. voltage, E^ ^, in suitably small

steps , e.g., 0.1 volt per step, and measure gain, G(dB), at
each step in the following way:
a. With the d.c. voltage at the selected step, adjust

the output level of the signal generator to produce reference
audio output power. P .
b. Measure the gain as in Step 8, above, for each selected

d.c. voltage step.
10. Continue as indicated in Step 9, above, until the

upper limit, of the dynamic range (cf.) of the receiver
is reached.
11. Plot a graph of gain, G(dB), in decibels, vs. AGC

voltage, E^ ^ in volts, on semi-logarithm paper. This is
,
the static AGC characteristic of the receiver.

or megahertz.

3. Record the value of termination resistance, R , in

ohms, connected to the receiver audio output terminals.
4. Record the reference output power, P , in watts.

o
120
. : .
5. Record the d.c. AGC voltage, E , in volts, at

each step
6. Record the open circuit signal voltage, , in

microvolts, at each step.
7. Record the measured value of Z , in ohms.

s
8. Record the calculated value of P , in microvratts

a
9. Record the calculated gain, G, in decibels, at each

step

f ollov/ing
1. Uncertainty, LE^, in the measured value of E.
2. Uncertainty, IP , in the measured value of P

^ o o
3. Uncertainty, IR , in the measured value of R , and

s s
AX , in the measured value of X .
s s
The total relative uncertainty, iG(dB) , in decibels, in

the gain G, is given approximately, for small uncertainties,
by the equation
AG(dB) = 10 log
where
and
15P
o
G =
16P
a
121
The uncertainty, AP , is obtained from the manufacturer's
specifications on the distortion analyzer. The relative
uncertainty, AP /P , in P , is obtained from the equation
a a a
AP AE. (R ^) AR 2X ^ AX
a _ 2 1 + s s s _|_
s s
P
a
E.
1 ss
(R ^+X 2) R
s
(R
ss ^) X
s
*
-
4.3.3.2. STATIC AGC CHARACTERISTIC; LEVELING EFFECT
4.3.3.2.1. DEFINITION
Static AGC characteristic, leveling effect, is the

functional relationship between audio output signal level
and receiver input signal level.
4.3.3.2.2. PURPOSE

static AGC characteristic, in terms of its leveling effect on
the audio output signal, for an AM receiver having an AGC system.
This characteristic is another measure of the degree to which
the AGC system is effective in controlling the gain of a receiver.
This method accounts for the over-all effect of the amplifier
and AGC circuits in the receiver.
4.3.3.2.3. METHOD

a true rms voltmeter or power meter as shown in figure 4.3.3.2.
The signal generator supplies a known input voltage to the
receiver at the measurement frequency. The voltmeter or power
meter measures the receiver output signal level. The leveling
effect of the AGC system is displayed graphically by a plot cf
output signal level vs. input signal level.
122
I
o
I— Od o q;
h- o
I
I—I LlJ
<: h- I— M
z oo cm >-
I— 1—
1
O _J
2: oo h- «=C
q: uj
LU q; I-" <:
Q
6
U_ I—
LlJ O
UJ
<:
O
z:
=c 1— q:
.
Q :ro
UJ o3
Q- I— I—
^ cC UJ
o
—1 1—
a: cc
^ q:
e3 UJ
1—1 2:
00 UJ
an
123
typical conditions. The method uses moderately sophisticated
but commonly available test equipment.


to the specified load resistance, R^^ , and a power rating in excess
of the receiver's rated audio output power level, to the output
port of the receiver. Connect the audio DISTORTION ANALYZER
across the resistor.
3. Set the receiver controls as given in Table XVIII.


to 30% at 1000 Hz.
124
TABLE XVIII
Automatic Gain Control; Leveling Effect
Control Setting
6 . AF Gain 6. As required
8 . Detector Mode 8. AM
9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9. OFF
13 . Noise Limiter 13. OFF
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. AGC
125
. .
6. Measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY, E., as outlined

1
in Section 4.1.3.
7. Increase the output level of the signal generator by

10 dB, i.e. , to 3. 16 E .
8. Measure the audio output power,

^
P . This should be
o 1
slightly greater than the reference audio output power, P^.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 until the maximum rated output

power for the receiver is reached.
Note: Changes of input signal level that are smaller

than 10 dB can be made if greater detail of the
AGC characteristic is desired.
10. Plot graph of output power, in watts, vs. open

a
circuit input signal level, in microvolts, on semi- logarithm
paper. This is the AGC characteristic, leveling effect, of
the receiver.

megahertz


4. Record the reference output power, P^ , in watts.
5. Record the open circuit input signal voltage, in

microvolts, at each step.
6. Record the output power level, in watts, at each step.
126
: .

following
1. Uncertainty, AE^ , in the measured value of open

circuit input signal voltage, E^
2. Uncertainty, AP^ or AP^ ^ , in the measured value of

output power, P^ or P^^
The relative uncertainty, AE^(%) , in the signal voltage,

E^ , expressed as a percent, is given by the equation
AE
AE .
1
(%) = —E
^
.
.
X 100
1
The relative uncertainty, AP^(%) , in the output power, P^

(or Pqj^) / expressed as a percent, is given by the equation
AP
AP (%) = ^ 100.
o P
o

generator. Uncertainty AP^ is obtained from the manufacturer's
specifications on the distortion analyzer.
The total relative uncertainty, AEP(%) , in a point on the

AGC leveling effect curve is given by the equation
AEP (%) = AE . (%) + AP (%) .
127
4.3.3.3. DYNAMIC AGC CHARACTERISTICS
4.3.3.3.1. DEFINITIONS
a. The dynamic AGC characteristics are the attack and

decay time constants, in microseconds or milliseconds, of the
AGC voltage.
b. For the output of a first-order system forced by a

step or an impulse, time constant is the time required to
complete 63.2 percent of the total rise or decay. (IEEE
Std 100-1972)
4.3.3.3.2. PURPOSE

attack and decay time constants of the AGC system of AM
receivers. These time constants are a measure of quickness
and holding ability of automatic gain control which determine
the uniformity of the receiver's audio output signal.
128
4.3.3.3.3. METHOD
The method uses an unmodulated signal generator, a SPOT

reed relay, and a D.C. oscilloscope as shown in figure
4.3.3.3. The signal generator supplies a known input voltage
to the receiver through the reed relay. The oscilloscope
displays the change in AGC voltage after the relay is
switched. The attack and decay time constants of the AGC
circuit are determined from the display, using the scale
calibrations of the oscilloscope.

2. 30 dB attenuator having a characteristic impedance

equal to the specified source impedance, Z^, for the receiver
3. SPOT reed relay
4. D.C. oscilloscope with delayed internal triggering
5. Oscilloscope camera

port of the REED RELAY through the 30 dB ATTENUATOR.
2. Connect one of the input ports of the REED RELAY to

the output port of the SIGNAL GENERATOR.
129
1 1
' '
o
o
CO (0
o
—1
-P
_J (d
—
» +»
o f—
en —
(
(0
o LlI
> o
1— u
Q Q
g
-H
EH
o
M
-P
c:
o
u
-H
o
o
H
4J
(d
o
+»
a
o I
4J
CD
-o <t (U
W
o z: +»
CO
ATTE
01
•H
130
. .
3. Connect the other input port of the REED RELAY to

ground
4. Connect the OSCILLOSCOPE vertical input port to the

AGC bus in the receiver, using a high-impedance (^10
megohm) D.C. probe. Make the connection following the RC
networks that establish the time constants of the AGC
system.
5. Provide a trigger voltage from the coil circuit of

the reed relay to the trigger circuit of the oscilloscope.
6. Set the receiver controls as given in Table XIX.

8. Set the output level from the signal generator to

approximately 1,000,000 microvolts.
9. Set the reed relay in the OFF position, i.e., with

its output port grounded.
10. Adjust the horizontal and vertical controls of the

oscilloscope so that when the reed relay is switched to the
ON position, the AGC bus voltage change will be displayed
throughout from its no-signal value to its full-signal
value
11. Calibrate the vertical scale in volts per centimeter
and the horizontal scale in seconds per centimeter.
12. Switch the reed relay to the ON position, and

photograph the display of AGC voltage change.
131
.. .
TABLE XIX
Automatic Gain Control; Time Constants
Control o Ti- uiiig
1 Band Switch n
X . r\t> CI ±X fci U.
2 . Frequency Tuning z .
3 . Antenna Trimmer o .
"P (Ci ;a V
A/T ^ V T Tn 1 TTl
RF Gain A
inciA J_lllUill 1
5 . IF Gain 5. ^ 'V T TTl 1 Tn

FiciXXlllU.Ul 1
6 . AF Gain 6 . up t lonax
8 . Detector Mode 8 .
9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9. Ur r
10 . BFO Frequency 10 . N A , .
11 IF Bandwidth 11 7\
/iib
cr T
QfcibJ.rc;Q
15 . AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. AGC
132
.
Measure the time constant of the AGC attack time as

13.
follows: (a) Determine the starting point of the AGC voltage
change; (b) determine the total AGC voltage change;
(c) determine the point at which the voltage reached 63.2%
of its total change. The attack time constant is the time
interval between (a) and (c)
14. Adjust the horizontal controls of the oscilloscope,

if required, so that when the reed relay is switched to the
OFF position, the AGC bus voltage change will be displayed
throughout from its full-signal value to its no-signal value.
Recalibrate the horizontal scale as required.
15. Switch the reed relay to the OFF position, and

photograph the display of the AGC voltage change.
16 . Measure the time constant of the AGC decay time as

per Step 13, above. The decay time constant is the time
interval between the starting point of the AGC voltage change
and the point at which the voltage has reached 63.2% of
its final value.

or megahertz.
2. Record the open circuit voltage at the output

terminals of the signal generator.
3.Record the scale calibration factors for the oscilloscope

display in volts per centimeter (vertical) and seconds per
centimeter (horizontal).
133
4. Record the measured AVC attack time constant, in
microseconds or milliseconds, and the measured AVC decay
time constant, in milliseconds or seconds.

following:
1. Uncertainty, At, in the horizontal calibration factor,

t/cm, of the oscilloscope
2. Uncertainty, AV, in the voltage (vertical) reading,

V, of the oscilloscope display
3. Uncertainty, AT, in the time (horizontal) reading, T,

of the oscilloscope display
The total relative uncertainty, At(%)expressed in per-

,
cent in either the attack time constant or the decay time

constant, is given by the equation
At (%)
Uncertainty At is obtained from the manufacturer's specifica-

tions on the voltage and time scale calibrators. Uncertainties
AV and AT are obtained from the reading resolution of oscilloscope
display; these are normally estimated from the characteristics of
the actual display.
134
:
4.4. SELECTIVITY
Selectivity is a measure of the extent to which a receiver

is capable of differentiating between a desired signal and
disturbances at other frequencies. (IEEE Std 100-1972)
There are various receiver parameters that describe

selectivity in different ways, for different conditions, and
with differing degrees of adequacy. Selectivity in terms of
the response to a single frequency is described by the follow-
ing parameters
1. Selectance
2. CW bandwidth
3. Shape factor
4. Modulation acceptance bandwidth
5. Spurious response attenuation
In terms of random signals occupying large regions of spec-

trum, selectivity is expressed by the parameter,
6. Noise bandwidth.
Parameters explicitly relating to the effects of one or more

disturbing signals on the reception of a desired signal are
the following:
7. Desensitization
8. Crossmodulation
9. Adjacent channel selectivity
10. Intermodulation
135
. .
Finally, receiver response to impulsive-type signals is

expressed by the parameter,
11. Impulse bandwidth.
Measurement methods for these parameters are given in the

following sub-sections
4.4.1. SELECTANCE
4.4.1.1. DEFINITION
Selectance is a measure of the falling off in the response

of a resonant device with departure from resonance. It is
expressed as the ratio of the amplitude of response at the
resonance frequency, to the response at some frequency differing
from it by a specified amount. (IEEE Std 100-1972)
The selectance of a receiver is the voltage response

characteristic as a function of frequency around the principal
response frequency of the receiver. It normally pertains to a
linear receiver. For non-linear receivers, such as those with
clipping or AGC, selectance may be a function of signal level.
4.4.1.2. PURPOSE

selectance of a receiver in terms of voltage response
as a function of frequency. This characteristic is a measure
of the spectrum of frequencies, centered around the principal
response frequency, which the receiver will amplify with
significant gain. It is not an adequate measure of the
receiver's ability to deliver an output signal of acceptable
quality in the presence of signals outside of its principal
response
136
.
4.4.1.3. METHOD, POINT-BY-POINT - I
The method uses a variable frequency CW generator, an

accurate frequency meter, and an R.F. voltmeter as shown in
figure 4.4.1.1. The signal generator supplies a known variable
input voltage to the receiver at a variety of frequencies
within the principal response range of the receiver. The
voltmeter measures the I.F. output voltage. The output level
of the signal generator is adjusted to maintain a constant
output voltage at the voltmeter input terminals
The voltage gain betv/een the receiver input terminals and

the I.F. output terminals is thus measured at the various
selected frequencies . Selectance is the graphical plot of (a)
the ratio of I.F. output voltage to receiver input voltage

versus (b) measurement frequency.
Note: Because of the good signal-to-noise ratio it

can provide, this method may give better
measurement results at frequencies far removed
from the central frequency than the method given
in Section 4.4.1.4., below. That method may give
better measurement results at frequencies near
the central frequency because of better control
of overloading. Best results may be obtained by
measuring from maximum response to -20 dB or
-30 dB down from maximum response by the method
of Section 4.4.1.4., and then fromi there down
to the noise lim.it by the method of this Section.

besu conditions, and range from approximately 8% to 40% under
typical conditions The method uses simple and commonly
.
137
1 1 I
-p
-H
o
>i
Xi
+J
o
o
c
(0
+J
o
—
I— O
m
QI0 < 3
_1 I—
LU
O- 1— 1— O UJ
2: cC UJ iJ
1—
-P
CO
0)
—I I—
o
ej UJ
I— z:
I
00 UJ
CD
138
1. Variable frequency signal generator
3. Frequency meter
4. Isolation network
5. R.F. voltmeter

impedance equals , no matching network is required.
2. Connect the FREQUENCY METER to the output port of the

signal generator through an ISOLATION NETWORK.
3. Connect the R.F. voltmeter across the output terminals

of the last I.F. stage.
4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XX.
5 . Tune the signal generator and the receiver to the

6. Adjust the output level of the signal generator to a

value E^^, that is approximately 10 dB below the upper voltage
level of the receiver's dynamic range (cf.).
139
TABLE XX
Selectance, Point-by-Point Method I
Control Setting
4. RF Gain 4. Relatively low
5. IF Gain 5. Medium
6 . AF Gain 6 . Minimum
7. Line Gain 7. Minimum
8. Detector Mode 8. N.A.
10. BFO Frequency 10 . N.A.
12. AF Bandwidth 12. N.A.
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. MGC
16 . Meter Switch •
16 . N.A.
140
:
7. Determine the open circuit signal voltage E^^ in

8. Adjust the sensitivity of the R.F. voltmeter to produce

a convenient, near full-scale deflection, E .
o
9. Measure output voltage, E^, in volts.
10. Compute the voltage ratio, R(f^) , in decibels, as

follows
E
R(f ) = 20 log
o E. X 10"^
lO
11. Record R(f ) , in decibels, and the measurement fre-

o
quency, f^, in kilohertz or megahertz.
12. Tune the signal generator to a new measurement frequency,

f J , above (or below) f^. The frequency change, Af, where
Af = f, - ,
is somewhat arbitrary and depends upon the degree of detail with

which it is desired to know the selectance.
13. Leave the receiver tuned to frequency f^.

value, E^^, that again produced output voltage E^.
15. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^^, in

microvolts as in Step 7, above.
16. Compute the voltage ratio, R(fi) , in decibels, as in

Step 10, above.
17. Record R(fi), in decibels, and the measurement frequency,

f J , in kilohertz or megahertz.
141
18. Proceed as indicated in Steps 12 through 17, each time
changing the frequency in convenient small steps. Continue
until the voltage ratio, R, in decibels, is 0 dB or as small
as practicable.
19. Plot the voltage ratio, R, in decibels, as a function

of measurement frequency, f, on rectilinear graph paper. This
plot is the selectance of the receiver.
1. Record the measurement frequencies in kilohertz or

megahertz .

3. Record the open circuit signal voltages, in microvolts,

at the output terminals of the matching network, if used;
otherwise, at the ouput terminals of the generator.
4. Record the I.F. output voltage, E^, in volts
5. Record the voltage ratios, R(f), in decibels.

following
'
1. Uncertainty, AE. , in the measured values of E.
3. Uncertainty, Af, in the measured values of f
142
The total relative uncertainty, AR(dB), in decibels,
in the voltage gain, R, is given approximately, for small
uncertainties , by the equation
AR(dB) = 20 log
where
AE. AE
AR ^ 1 o
R E. E
X o
Uncertainties AE. and AE are obtained from the manufacturer's

1 o
specf ications on the output level indicator of the signal
generator and on the R,F. voltmeter, respectively. Uncertainty
Af is obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on the
frequency meter.
4.4.1.4. METHOD, POINT-BY-POINT - II
The method uses a variable frequency CW generator and an

R.F. voltmeter as shown in figure 4.4.1.2. The signal generator
supplies a constant known input voltage to the receiver at a
variety of frequencies within the principal response range of
the receiver. The voltmeter measures the I.E. output voltage.
The voltage gain between the receiver input terminals and the
I.E. output terminals is thus measured at the various selected
frequencies. Selectance is the graphical plot of (a) the ratio
of I.E. output voltage to receiver input voltage versus (b)
measurement frequency.

typical conditions The method uses simple and commonly
.
available test equipment. Refer to Note, Section 4.4.1.3.
4.4.1.4.1. TEST EQUIPxMENT REQUIRED
143
H 1
LU O
h-
LU
2:
I—
_l
S
0 -P
> c
-H
o
>^
P
<!!> r-»
O
U- I—
q; —
0
I
LU
>•
1— o
CE G
T nJ
+J
O
0)
<;
p iH
(I)
W
M
O
•4-1
UJ
-p
0)
<: •-
cn
Q rc o
LU C_J 3 -P
Q- 1— 1— 0]
s: <: LU (U
•"H 21 2:
—I I—
o cn
o: <t:
tS LU
t/) LU
144
3. Frequency meter
5. R.F. voltmeter

impedance equals , no matching network is req,uired.


4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XX, p. 140.

measurement frequency, f .

value E^^ , that is approximately 10 dB below the upper voltage
level of the receiver's dynamic range (cf.).
7. Determine the open circuit signal voltage E^^, in

if used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the generator
8. Adjust the sensitivity of the R.F. voltmeter to

produce a convenient, near full-scale deflection, E .
145
:
9. Measure output voltage, , in volts.
10. Compute the voltage ratio, I^(fQ) ' decibels as

follows
E
R(f )
o'
= 20 log
^ E. X 10"^ ^ .
lO
11. Record R(f ) , in decibels, and the measurement fre-

o
quency, f^ , in kilohertz or megahertz.
12. Tune the signal generator to a new measurement fre-

quency, fj, above (or below) f^. The frequency change, Af,
where
- Af = f, - ,
is somewhat arbitrary and depends upon the degree of detail

with which it is desired to know the selectance. Leave the
generator level the same as in Step 7, above.
13. Leave the receiver tuned to frequency f^.
14. Measure output voltage, , in volts.
15. Compute the voltage ratio, R(fi), in decibels as follows
E
°^
R(fl) = 20 log
E. X 10"^
1
16. Record R{fi), in decibels, and the measurement fre-

quency, fi, in kilohertz or megahertz.
17. Proceed as indicated in Steps 11 through 15, each time

changing the frequency in small steps. Continue until the
output voltage, E^, reaches the level produced by the internal
noise of the receiver.
18. Plot the voltage ratio, R, in decibels, as a function

of measurement frequency, f, on rectilinear graph paper. This
plot is the selectance of the receiver.
: .
1. Record the measurement frequencies in kilohertz

or megahertz

3. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E^^, in microvolts,

otherwise, at the output terminals of the generator.
4. Record the I.E. output voltages, E^, in volts.
5. Record the voltage ratios, R(f), in decibels.
1. The principal sources of measurement error are the

following
1. Uncertainty, AE., in the measured value of E.
2. Uncertainty, AE , in the measured values of E
The total relative uncertainty, AR(dB), in decibels, in

the voltage gain, R, is given approximately, for small
AR(dB) = 20 log
where
o
o
147
Uncertainties AE. and AE are obtained from th e manufacturer'
1 o
specifications on the output level indicator of th e signal
generator and on the R.F. voltmeter, respectively. Uncertainty
Af is obtained from the manufacturer's specif icati ons on the
frequency meter.
4.4.1.5. METHOD, SWEPT-FREQUENCY
The method uses a swept-f requency CW signal generator and

an oscilloscope as shown in figure 4.4.1.3. The signal generator
supplies a swept frequency signal of constant amplitude to the
receiver. The oscilloscope displays the detected output voltage
from the receiver. Also, the signal generator supplies a linear
sweeping voltage for the horizontal deflection circuits of the
oscilloscope, and marker signals for calibrating the frequency
(horizontal) scale of the display. A camera is used to photograph
the oscilloscope display to obtain a permanent record of the
selectance.

typical conditions. The method uses simple and commonly
1. Swept-f requency signal generator
3. Cathode-ray oscilloscope
148
o
0)
s
>1
o
(U
(U
u
I
-p
0)
o
c
nJ
+J
o
0)
H
0)
CO
mo
-p
(1)
-p
01
0)
EH
>-
z:
UJ
ZD
cr_)
O
1—
Ll_ CD LjJ
1 1—1
1— 00 LxJ
D. Cm
LlJ
149
.

NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance, to
the receiver at the measurement frequency, f ^ If the signal
.

required.
2. Connect the OSCILLOSCOPE to the detector output as

shown in figure 4.4.1.3.
3. Connect the sweeping voltage output from the generator

to the horizontal input terminals of the oscilloscope.
4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXI.
6. Adjust the output level of the sweep generator, the

sweep width of the sweep generator, and the vertical and
horizontal gains of the oscilloscope to produce a display of
the detector output voltage having sufficient size to fill
the square measurement area of the oscilloscope screen. Use
dc coupling in the oscilloscope. If the receiver bandwidth
is narrow, use as slow a generator sweep rate as practicable.
The output level is adjusted to provide an input signal
voltage that is no greater than 10 dB below the upper voltage
level of the receiver's dynamic range (cf.). The sweep width
is adjusted to display the full range of frequencies of the
principal receiver response, and no more.
7. Turn on sufficient marker generators to calibrate

the horizontal scale of the display in kilohertz or megahertz.
150
TABLE XXI
Selectance, Swept-Frequency Method
Control Setting
4. RF Gain 4. Relatively low
5 . IF Gain 5. Medium
6 . AF Gain 6 . Minimum
7 . Line Gain 7. Minimum
9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9. OFF
151
. .
8. Having obtained a suitable display, and with frequency

marker pips showing, photograph the display. This is the
selectance curve of the receiver.
9. Disconnect the vertical input of the oscilloscope from

the receiver detector circuit, and apply a signal from a
square-wave calibration source to calibrate the vertical scale
of the oscilloscope.
10. Determine the vertical scale factor, in volts per

centimeter and record this information on the back of the
photograph.'
11. Detemine the horizontal scale factor from the marker

frequencies, in kilohertz or megahertz per centimeter, and
record this information on the back of the photograph.
1. Record the measurement frequency, f^ in kilohertz

or megahertz
2. Record the value of source impedance, Zîn ohms,


4. Record the vertical scale factor, in volts per

centimeter
5. Record the horizontal scale factor, in kilohertz or

megahertz per centimeter.
152
Because this test is primarily qualitative, no error analysis

is provided here. An estimate of measurement error can be
obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on the various
test equipments used.
153
.
4.4.2. CW BANDWIDTH
4.4.2.1. DEFINITION
The CW bandwidth of a receiver is the range of frequencies,

in kilohertz or megahertz, that lies between the half-power
points of the selectance curve (cf.).
To the extent that selectance depends upon the operating

conditions of the receiver, CW bandwidth also depends upon these
operating conditions.
4.4.2.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to measure the CW

bandwidth of an AM receiver. CW bandwidth is a measure of the
spectrum of frequencies centered around the principal response
,
frequency, which the receiver will amplify with significant

gain. It is not an adequate measure of the receiver's ability
to deliver an output signal of acceptable quality in the
presence of other signals.
CW bandwidth is measured at an arbitrary gain value, i.e.,

-3 dB from maximum gain. It therefore does not give sufficient
information about the frequency response characteristic so that
different receivers can be intercompared It has maximum
.
utility when the frequency response characteristic has a single,

Gaussian-like shape. Only when this is the case does CW band-
width have the qualitative meaning that is assumed in engineering
j argon
4.4.2.3. METHOD, VARIABLE-FREQUENCY GENERATOR
The method uses a variable frequency CW generator, an accu-

rate frequency meter, a 3 dB attenuator, and an R.F. voltmeter
as shown in figure 4.4.2.1. The signal generator supplies a
known input voltage to the receiver. The R.F. voltmeter measures
154
1 —
UJ
1—
UJ
LL. s:
_i
o
> 13
O
0)
<!
o
u_ -p
en in
UJ o
>
1—

-H
%
G
«0
cq
LU
o >^ u
—
I cn.
o
I
<C i—i en I—
Q
UJ
3Z
o
O —I h-
u
o
3:
Q- 1— h- O UJ m
s:
•-^
<
^
UJ
sr
:3
+J
(U
CO
I +»
CO
<D
Eh
o
oo UJ
I—
X A CP
•H
—I I—
o
a; <=C
C3 UJ
>— I ^
00 UJ
CJ3
155
.
the I.F. output voltage, and the frequency meter measures the
generator frequency. The 3 dB attenuator is connected between
the signal generator and receiver, both of which are tuned to
the measurement frequency, f^. I.F. output voltage, , is
noted. Then the 3 dB attenuator is removed and the frequency
of the signal generator is adjusted above and below f^ to those
frequencies, f^ and f^, that produce the same output voltage,
E . CW bandwidth is the frequency
^
difference between f and f„
o ^ _ . u £

typical conditions. The method uses simple and commonly available
test equipment.
3. 3 dB attenuator
4 . Frequency meter
6. R.F. voltmeter

NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance to ,

required.
156
.
2 Connect the FREQUENCY METER to the output port of the

.

4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXII.

6 . With the 3 dB attenuator connected between the signal

generator and the matching transformer, adjust the output
level of the generator to a value that is within the linear
operating range of the receiver; i.e., at least 10 dB inside
the lower and upper voltage levels of the receiver's dynamic
range (cf . )
7. Determine the open circuit signal voltage E^, in

8. Adjust the sensitivity of the R.F. voltmeter to produce

a convenient, near full-scale deflection, E .
o
9. Measure output voltage, E^, in volts.
10. Without changing the output level setting of the

generator, remove the 3 dB attenuator and connect the signal
generator directly to the matching network.
11. Increase the frequency of the generator above f^ until

the I.F. output voltage is again E^.
12. Readjust the generator output level control, if

necessary, to produce the value, E^, obtained in Step 7, above.
157
. . .
TABLE XXII
CW Bandwidth, Generator Method
Control Setting
1 Band Switch 1. As desired
3 . Antenna Trimmer 3 . Peak

A
4 RF Gain 4 . Relativelv low
5 . IF Gain 5 . Medium
6 . AF Gain 6 . Min imum
7 . Line Gain 7 Mini mnTn
8 . Detector Mode 8 . N . A
10 . BFO Frequency 10 N A
11 IF Bandwidth 11 . A <=; rip ^ i c\
12 . AF Bandwidth 12. N. A.
16. Meter Switch 16. N.A.
158
.
13. Repeat Steps 11 and 12 until a frequency above is
found that produced when the signal voltage is E^.
14. Measure this frequency, f^.
15. Decrease the frequency of the generator below f^ until

the detector output voltage is again E^.
16 Proceed as in Steps 12 and 15 until a frequency below

.
f is found that produces E when the signal voltage is E..

o o 1
17. Measure this frequency, f^.
18. Subtract from f to give the CW bandwidth B(CW).

That is,
B(CW) = - f, .
1. Record the measurement frequency, f^, in kilohertz

or megahertz.


if used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the generator,
4. Record the I.E. output voltage, E^ , in volts.
5. Record the -3dB upper frequency, f^, in kilohertz or

megaherts.
6. Record the -3dB lower frequency, f^, in kilohertz or

megahertz
159
, ,
7. Record the CW bandwidth, B(CW) , in kilohertz or megahertz.
The principal sources of measurement error are the uncertain-

ties, AdB , in the attenuation of the 3 dB attenuator, and AE , in
o
the indicated value of E^. The uncertainty, Af, in the measured
value of frequency is ordinarily insignificant compared with AdB
and AE .
o
The total relative uncertainty, AB(%) , expressed in percent,

in the measured value of bandwidth, B, is given by the equation
'
AB(%) = ~
AR
X 100 ,
where the uncertainty, AB , is given by the equation
AB = (C„ + C ) (2.3 AdB + AE )

I u o
and are the slopes of the selectance curve, in hertz per

volt, at the frequencies f„ and f , respectively. They are
determined by measuring the change, <5E^, in output voltage,
E^ , for a small change, 6f, in frequency around f^ or f
u
That is
6E
o f=f
C = 6f
u 6e
f=f
For a symmetrical selectance curve, Uncertain- |C = C_

u
ties AdB and AE are obtained from the manufacturer's specif ica-
o
tions on the 3 dB attenuator and R.F. voltmeter, respectively.
160
.
4.4.2.4. METHOD, SWEPT-FREQUENCY GENERATOR
The method uses a swept- frequency CW signal generator and

an oscilloscope as shown in figure 4.4.2.2. The signal generator
receiver. The oscilloscope displays the detected output voltage
from the receiver. Also, the signal generator supplies a linear
sweeping voltage for the horizontal deflection circuits of the
oscilloscope, and marker signals for calibrating the frequency
(horizontal) scale of the display. A camera is used to obtain a
permanent record of the display. The CW bandwidth is found by
determining the width of the display at the half power points.
1. Swept- frequency signal generator
1. Obtain the selectance curve of the receiver as outlined

in Section 4.5.1.5.
2. Locate the points on the curve that are 71% of the distance
from the base line of the curve to the top of the curve. These are
the 71% voltage gain points or 50% power gain (-3dB) points on
the curve
3. Determine the width of the curve, in kilohertz, between

these points, using the scale calibration factor in kilohertz
per centimeter. This is the CW bandwidth of the receiver.
161
(
UJ M O
Q. q:
o o
(_) 3:
tr)
o S
_1 >i
_J
t— 1— O
o a:
Q)
LU
o AO
(U
M
I
+»
0)
IS
CO
o
Xi
-a
UJ
-H
(d
U
u
o
tM
^ ^z: Oi
cc >— o;
Q 3: o 3
UJ o 3
I
-P
Q- I— I— 0)
s: =1 UJ
w
+»
CO
- CN
<_)
UJ q:
ZD
Cr—J
o
h-
UJ <:
U_ CD UJ 0^
I •—. z
I— 00 UJ 1^4
Q. CD
162
. . .
1. Record the measurement frequency, in kilohertz

or megahertz
2. Record the value of source impedance, in ohms,


4. Record the vertical scale factor, in volts per

centimeter
5. Record the horizontal scale factor, in kilohertz or

megahertz per centimeter.
6. Record the frequencies^ in kilohertz or megahertz,

at the 50% power gain points on the selectance curve.
7. Record the CW bandwidth, B(CW), in kilohertz or

megahertz
Because this test is primarily qialitative , no error

analysis is provided here. An estimate of measurement error
can be obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on
the various test equipments used.
163
4.4.3. SHAPE FACTOR
Shape Factor is the ratio of (a) the selectance bandwidth

at -6 0 dB below the maximum gain point to (b) the selectance
bandwidth at -6 dB below the maximum gain point.
Selectance bandwidth is the range of frequencies that lies

between two specified points of the selectance curve (c.f.).
Note: When the measurement dynamic range does not permit

measurement over a 60 dB range, shape factor may
be defined in terms of some other gain points,
such as the -40 dB and -6 dB points.
4.4.3.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to measure the shape

factor of the selectance of a receiver. Shape factor is a
measure of the slope of the sides of the selectance curve. It has
importance as a measure of the ability of a receiver to pass the
desired frequency components of an amplitude modulated signal
while at the same time rejecting undesired signals adjacent to
the desired signal.
4.4.3.3. METHOD

accurate frequency meter, a 54 d.B attenuator, a 60 dB attenuator,
and an R.F. voltmeter as shown in figure 4.4.3. The signal
generator supplies a known input voltage to the receiver, the
R.F. voltmeter measures the I.F. output voltage, and the frequency
meter measures the generator frequency. The 54 dB and 60 dB
164
1 1
a:
LU
1—
LU
s:
_i
o
i u
o
+)
1—
o
cc:
LU
O o nj
>
h—
Cm
0)
UJ cr LU
LU z:
LU zr cc
a: < CO
C
M
O
LjJ -p
O ii^
1-1 Ql
< \- o CO
Q o +J
LU O3
D. h- h-
—I I—
O LU
cn
<D
s: ct LU Eh
I-" s: z
X
Cn
o o H
fi4
CO I— CQ h-
-a cC T3 <
ZD ZD
O 2=
\r> lju LU
X X
CC
—I I—
O
< <c
CD LU
1—1 z
CO LU
C3
165
attenuators are used, in turn, to decrease the input signal
to the receiver when measuring the receiver gain at the -6 dB
and 0 dB points, respectively^ on the selectance curve. The
upper and lower frequencies, f^(-6 dB) , f^(-6n dB ) , f (-6 dB) ,
f^(-60 dB) , are measured and used to calculate the shape factor,
S , where
"
f^(-60dB) - f^(-60dB)
^ " f ( -6dB) - f ( -6dB)
•
This method can be used as given only when the receiver

has at least a 60 dB dynamic range. See the Note under
Section 4.4.3.1. above.

typical conditions. The method uses simple and commonly
3. 54 dB attenuator
4. 60 dB attenuator
5. Frequency meter ^
7. R.F. voltmeter
. .
4.4.3.5. PROCEDURE

the receiver at the measurement frequency, f ^ . If the signal
required.

3. Connect the R.F. VOLTMETER across the output terminals

of the last I.E. stage.
4. Set the receiver controls as given in Table XXIII.

measurement frequency, f^
6. With the 60 dB ATTENUATOR connected between the signal

generator and the matching transformer, adjust the output level
of the signal generator to a value, E^, that is 10 dB below the
upper voltage level of the receiver's dynamic range (cf .) .
7. Determine the open circuit signal voltage E^ , in

microvolts, at the output terminals of the matching network, if
8. Measure the output voltage, E^
9. Without changing the output level setting of the generator,

remove the 6 0 dB attenuator and connect the 54 dB ATTENUATOR
between the signal generator and the matching network.
167
. .
TABLE XXIII
Shape Factor
Control Setting
3 . Antenna Trimmer 3 . Peak
4 . RF Gain 4 . Relatively low
5 . IF Gain 5 . Medium
6 . AF Gain '
6. Minimum
7. Line Gain 7 . Minimum
8 . Detector Mode 8 . N. A.
10. BFO Frequency 10 . N. A.
11 IF Bandwidth 11 As desired
168
. . .

the I.F. output voltage is again .
11. Readjust the generator output level control, if necessary,

to produce the value, E^, obtained in Step 7 above.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until a frequency above f^ is

found that produces E^ when the signal voltage is E^.
13. Measure this frequency, f^(-6 dB) This is the upper

.
frequency at which the receiver gain is 6 dB below that at f^.
14. Decrease the frequency of the generator below f^ until

the I.F. output voltage is again E^
15. Proceed as in Steps 11 and 12 until a frequency below

f^ is found that produces E^ when the input voltage is E^
16. Measure this frequency, f^(-6 dB) . This is the lower

frequency at which the receiver gain is 6 dB below that at f^
17. Without changing the output level setting of the

generator, remove the 54 dB attenuator and connect the signal
generator directly to the matching network.

the I.F. output voltage is again E^
19. Readjust the generator output level control, if necessary,

to produce the value, E^, obtained in Step 7 above.
20. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until a frequency above f^ is

found that produces E^ when the signal voltage is E^.
169
.
21. Measure this frequency, f^(-60 dB) . This is the upper

Decrease the frequency of the generator below f^ until

22.
^1
the I.F. output voltage is again E^.
23. Proceed as in Steps 11 and 12 until a frequency below

f is found that produces
^ E when the input voltage is E.
o o
24. Measure this frequency, f^(-60 dB) . This is the lower

25. Subtract ^^(-^ dB) from f^(-6 dB) to give the band-
width at the -6 dB points.
26. Subtract f . (-60 dB) from f (-60 dB) to give the band-
A/ U.
width at the -60 dB points.
27. Compute the shape factor, S, by the equation
f (-60dB) - f (-60dB)
^
S = •
f ( -6dB) - f „ ( -6dB)
u £

or megahertz.


microvolts, at the output terminals of the matching network
if used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the generator,
170
4. Record the I.F. output voltage, , in volts.
5. Record the -6 dB upper frequency, f^(-6 dB) , in kilohertz

or megahertz.
6. Record the -6 dB lower frequency, f ,

(-6 dB) , in kilohertz
^
or megahertz.
7. Record the -60 dB upper frequency, f^(-60 dB) , in

kilohertz or megahertz,
8. Record the -60 dB lower frequency, f.(-60 dB) , in

kilohertz or megahertz.
9. Record the shape factor, S , as a numeric ratio, usually

expressed in the form
S = B(-60 dB) / B(-6dB) : 1

Because this test is primarily qualitative, no error analysis
is provided here. An estimate of measurement error can be obtained
from the manufacturer's specifications on the various test
equipments used.
171
4.4.4. MODULATION ACCEPTANCE BANDWIDTH
4.4.4.1. DEFINITION
The modulation acceptance bandwidth of an FM receiver is

the deviation, in kilohertz, that will produce a 12 dB SINAD
ratio at an RF signal level of 6 dB above the 12 dB SINAD
SENSITIVITY of the receiver.
Although the basic concept of modulation acceptance bandwidth

applies also to an AM receiver, no such receiver parameter has
been so defined.
- 4.4.4.2. PURPOSE

modulation acceptance bandwidth of an FM receiver. Modulation
acceptance bandwidth is a measure of the maximum deviation of
a frequency modulated carrier that can produce an audio output
signal of acceptable quality. The method takes into account the
effects of distortion of the desired signal within the receiver.
However, it does not take into account the output degradation
effects caused by undesired signals.
4.4.4.3. METHOD
The method uses a frequency modulated signal generator and

an audio distortion analyzer as shown in figure 4.4.4. First,
the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity is measured (cf) . Then, the
generator output level is increased by 6 dB, and the modulation
deviation is increased until a 12 dB SINAD ratio is again obtained.
Twice the deviation, in kilohertz, required for this is the
modulation acceptance bandwidth of the receiver.
172
I
o
I— cc
I O OC
I— o I— UJ
I
< I— M
Z I—
00 q: >-
—
t—t I
o _i
2: 00 h- <:
Q£ LU oo z
LjJ t-H <:
Q
2; 2: ^
Q o
zi:
UJ o3
ci. I— I—
s <: LU
o
—1 1—
<t <
tD UJ
I— ZI
00 UJ
03
173
.

typical conditions The method uses commonly available test
.
3. Termination resistor for receiver output load
4.4.4.5. PROCEDURE
1.Measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY as outlined in

Section 4.1.5. Refer to Table VIII for initial settings of
receiver controls
2. Increase the signal generator output level by exactly

6 dB.
3. Set the distortion analyzer so that the 1000 Hz rejection

filter is NOT in the circuit.
4. Adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce

reference audio output power, P^.
5.Adjust the distortion analyzer so that the lOQO Hz

signal generator.
174
. •
6. Measure the noise plus distortion output power, P

(n+d)
7. Calculate SINAD in decibels from the equation
P
SINAD CdB) = 10 log o
(n+d)
8. If the SINAD ratio calculated in Step 7 is greater

(or less) than 12 dB , increase (or decrease) the deviation
percentage and repeat Steps 3 through 7 Continue this .
procedure until 12 dB SINAD ratio is obtained.
9. Determine the deviation, f^, in kilohertz, for the

conditions obtained in Step 8. Twice f^ ^^f^) is the MODULATION
ACCEPTANCE BANDWIDTH of the receiver at frequency f .
o

megahertz

3. Record the value of termination resistance, R^, in

5. Record 12 dB SINAD sensitivity, in microvolts.
6. Record modulation acceptance bandwidth, 2f , in kilohertz.
175
1. Uncertainty, AE^, in the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity, E^
2. Uncertainty, frequency deviation, f^
The total relative uncertainty, Af^(%), expressed in percent,

in the modulation acceptance bandwidth, 2f^, is given approximately
by the equation
Af^ (%) = AE^ (%) +

d
The relative uncertainty, AE^(%), in the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity

is obtained as described in Section 4.1.3.7. The uncertainty, Af^,
is obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on the modulation
deviation of the signal generator.
176
4.4.5. SPURIOUS RESPONSE ATTENUATION
Spurious responses occur when a receiver, due to its

circuitry and construction, responds to frequencies other than
those in its principal response band. They are considered to
be those responses of a receiver to a single input frequency
only. Therefore, they are to be distinguished from responses
that occur in the presence of two or more simultaneous signals;
the latter are described by other terms such as cross modula-
tion (cf.) and intermodulation (cf.).
Spurious responses are usually generated when undesired

signals mix with receiver local oscillators or their harmonics
in non-linear stages of the receiver. However,, faulty receivers
having unintended regeneration may produce spurious responses
that are not related to local oscillator frequencies.
Spurious responses that consist of families of related re-

sponses can often be identified by the following relationships:
For a single conversion receiver:
pf. ± f
LO IF
f
s q
For a dual-conversion receiver:
± f
+
IF2
f
s q1
For a triple conversion receiver:
± f
+ IF3
f
S qiqaqs
177
where p is an integer or zero denoting the harmonic order of
the local oscillator, q is an integer (not zero) denoting the
harmonic order of the mixer input signal, f and f^.^ denote
J-iU IF
the local oscillator and intermediate frequency, respectively,
and the subscripts are indicative of the number of mixer stages
preceding the signal processing circuitry.
a. The spurious response attenuation of a receiver is the

ratio, expressed in decibels, of (a) the input voltage required
to produce reference audio output power due to a signal at a
spurious-response generating frequency, to (b) the input voltage
required to produce reference audio output power due to a signal
at the frequency to which the receiver is tuned.
b. A spurious response is any response, other than the

desired response, of an electric transducer or device. (IEEE
Std. 10 0-19 72)
4.4.5.2. PURPOSE

spurious response attenuation of surveillance receivers. Spurious
response attenuation is a measure of the spectrum of frequencies,
outside of the principal response region, to which the receiver
will respond with measurable output power. It is not an adequate
measure of the receiver's ability to reject undesired signals,
but it does reveal those frequencies where the receiver will be
most susceptible to undesired signals.
The test methods given below have general applicability to

all receiver spurious responses, including image, I.F. feed-through,
local oscillator-related, and extraneously produced responses.
178
.
4.4.5.3. METHOD - AM RECEIVERS
The method uses a variable-frequency amplitude modulated

signal generator and a power meter or true rms voltmeter as
shown in figure 4.4.5.1. The signal generator supplies a known
input voltage to the receiver over a range of frequencies. The
voltmeter or power meter indicates the receiver output signal
level
Before searching for spurious responses, the 6 dB SN/N

SENSITIVITY is measured. Then, with the receiver adjusted for
that measurement, the generator output level is increased to
a large value and its frequency is slowly adjusted until a
spurious response is produced. The input signal level is
adjusted at the frequency causing the spurious response to
produce reference audio output power. This input level, expressed
as a decibel ratio relative to the 6 dB sensitivity, is the
spurious response attenuation at that frequency. This process
is repeated for the next spurious response.
Measurement uncertainties as small as o 3 dB are possible under

.
best conditions, and range from approximately 0.4 dB to 1.5 dB under

179
I 1
o
— q:
o
I 1
I— en q;
< I— UJ UJ
1—
I — —
I I o 0 UJ
2: 00 CL. ^
on LU
o
•H
P
(d
c:
0)
-p
0)
o
(0
(1)
Pi
Csl LJ- 1—
(0
UJ <C ZD
>
1—
0 o
•H
UJ U
0 (—
UJ
en d W
Q 5-)
mO
ft
-P

cc >— q:
Q!O
.
CO
UJ O 3
(U
Eh
Q- (— h-
2: ct UJ
in
0
_l 1— •rH
<:
CD UJ
00 UJ
CD
180
4a. AF power meter
OR,
4b . True rms voltmeter


equal to the specified load resistance, R^ , and a power rating
the audio output port of the receiver. Connect the TRUE RMS
VOLTMETER across the resistor.
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R^, to the audio output port of
the receiver.
3. Measure the 6 dB SN/N SENSITIVITY as outlined in Section

4.1.2.5.
4. Adjust the output level of the signal generator to

maximum (e.g., 100,000 to 1,000,000 microvolts).
181
. .
Slowly tune the frequency of the generator away from

5.
the principal response region, and search for a response from the
receiver's output.
When a response is found, reduce the output level of

6.
the generator to give reference audio output power, .
Determine the frequency, f ^ in kilohertz or megahertz,

7. ,
and the open circuit signal voltage, in microvolts, at the ,
OUTPUT TERMINALS of the matching network, if used; otherwise, at

the output terminals of the generator.
8. Calculate the ratio, R(S) , in decibels, given by the

following equation:
E
R(S) = 20 log .
E
1
R(S) is the spurious response attenuation of the receiver,

referenced to the receiver's 6 dB SN/N sensitivity, at the
frequency f^
9. Proceed as indicated in Steps 4 through 8, above, until

the entire desired frequency range is covered.
1. Record the measurement f requency , in kilohertz or

f^
,
megahertz, to which the receiver is tuned.
2. Record the frequencies, f^ , in kilohertz or megahertz,

that cause the spurious response.
182
.
3. Record the value of source impedance, Z , in ohms,

s

connected to receiver audio output terminals
5a. Record the output voltage, E^, in volts.
OR,
5b. Record the reference output power, P^, in watts.
6. Record the 6 dB SN/N sensitivity, E^, in microvolts.
7. Record the open circuit voltages, E , in microvolts,

8. Record the spurious response attenuation, R(S) , in

decibels, for each spurious response.
3a. Uncertainty, AE^, in the measured value of E^
OR,
183
The total relative uncertainty, AR(dB), in decibels, in
the spurious response attenuation, R, is given approximately,
for small uncertainties, by the equations
(AE. AE AE \
AR (dB) 1 *
1
-E^+
s o '
•
t
OR,
IS^ ^
AE. AE , AP \
AR (dB) = 20 log n
I
+ + + -
^ o j
'
Uncertainties AE . and AE are obtained from the manufacturer's

1 s
generator.
^
Uncertainties AE and/or AP are obtained from the
o o
4.4.5.4. METHOD - FM RECEIVERS
The method uses an unmodulated signal generator and a true

rms voltmeter or power meter as shown in figure 4.4.5.2. The
signal generator supplies a known input voltage to the receiver
over a range of frequencies. The voltmeter or power meter
indicates the receiver output noise level.
Before searching for spurious responses, the 20 dB QUIETING

SENSITIVITY is measured. Then, with the receiver adjusted for
that measurement, the generator output level is increased to a
large value and its frequency is slowly adjusted until a spur-
ious response is produced. The input signal level is adjusted
at the frequency causing the spurious response to produce 20 dB
noise quieting. This input level, expressed as a decibel ratio
relative to the 20 dB quieting sensitivity, is the spurious
response attenuation at that frequency. This process is
repeated for the next spurious response.
184
I —
o
I—
I— o
<: (—
Z 00 Cm
1—( I t
o
llj
O
•H
-P
fd
a
(U
+j
4->
m
O
m
0)
=1: =3
O O
H
O
U
o
m
a,
1:5
-p
(U
O CD CO
<^ -p
Q IC O
UJ O 3
EH
O. I— h-
2: UJ
IT)
—I I—
O
•H
O UJ
U~i UJ
CD
185
Measurement uncertainties as small as 0 3 dB are possible under
.

1. CW Signal generator
4a. AF power meter
OR,
4b, True rms voltmeter
1- Connect the input port of the receiver to the output

required.

equal to the specified load resistance, R^^^ , and a power rating
186
.
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R^^ to the audio output port of
,
the receiver.
3a. Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate 25% of the

rated output power, P^. The voltage to be measured is given
by the equation
E = 0.5
o
OR,
3b. Set the power meter on a range to indicate 25% of the

rated output power, P^
4. Measure the 20 dB QUIETING SENSITIVITY as outlined in

Section 4.1.4.5.
5. Adjust the output level of generator No. 2 to maximum

(e.g., 100,000 to 1,000,000 microvolts).
6. Slowly tune the frequency of the generator away from

the principal response region, and search for a response from
the receiver's output.
7. When a response is found, reduce the output of the

generator to give 20 dB of noise quieting, measured as outlined
in Section 4.1.4.5.
8. Determine the frequency, f^, in kilohertz or megahertz,

and the open circuit signal voltage, E^ in microvolts, at the
,
OUTPUT TERMINAL of the matching network, if used; otherwise,

at the output terminals of the generator.
187
. . . .
Calculate the ratio, R(S)

9. , in decibels, given by
the following equation:
-. E
R(S) = 20 log .
ht
1
R(S) is the spurious response attenuation of the receiver,

referenced to the receiver's 20 dB quieting sensitivity, at
the frequency f ^
Proceed as indicated in Steps 5 through 9, above,

10.
until the entire desired frequency range is covered.
!• Record the measurement frequency, f^ , in kilohertz or

megahertz, to which the receiver is tuned.
Record the frequencies, f^, in kilohertz or megahertz,

2.
that cause the spurious response.


5. Record the measured output voltages, E^ , and 0.1 E^,

in volts
6. Record the measured output powers, 0.2 5 and

0 .0025 P , in watts.
o
Record the 20 dB quieting sensitivity, E^, in

7.
microvolts
188
8. Record the open circuit voltages, E^, in microvolts,
9. Record the spurious response attenuation, R(S) , in

decibels, for each spurious response.

o o
OR,

o ' o
The total relative uncertainty, AR(dB) , in decibels, in the

spurious response attenuation, R, is given approximately, for
small uncertainties, by the equations
AR (dB) = 20 log
OR ,
AR (dB) = 20 log
189
Uncertainties AE. and AE are obtained from the manufacturer's
1 s
generator.
^ Uncertainties AE and/or AP are obtained from the
o o
190
4.4.6. NOISE BANDWIDTH
4.4.6.1. DEFINITION
The noise bandwidth of a receiver is the width, in kilohertz

or megahertz, of a rectangular selectance curve whose height
and area are equal to the maximum height and enclosed area of
the receiver's actual selectance curve.
4.4.6.2. PURPOSE

noise bandwidth of surveillance receivers. Noise bandwidth is
a partial measure of the amount of random noise power that will
be delivered from the output terminals of the receiver. It is a
useful quantity for calculating output signal-to-noise ratio.
Because it is related only to the average width of the selectance
curve, it is not a good measure of the receiver's ability to
reject non-random signals.
4.4.6.3. METHOD

accurate frequency meter, and an R.F. voltmeter as shown in
figure 4.4.6. The signal generator supplies a known input
voltage to the receiver at a variety of frequencies within
the principal response range of the receiver. The voltmeter
measures the I.F. output voltage.
The selectance curve is obtained as described in Section

4.4.1. The height and area under the curve are determined,
and from these quantities noise bandwidth is calculated.
191
1 1 1
4J
TJ
•H
>-
rD <_) m
UJ 0 CC
>
»—
LU LU
ID h-
(U
(0
UJ cr LU •H
O I— LU 2: o
LU Z q:
Ll-
M
(;
O
M-l
-M
(U
CO
LxJ
-p
0 (0
2: ^ 1— on 0)
<C •-' q: I— 0
Q 0 <c 3
LU 0 3 _I h-
CL. 1—
h- 0 LU
s: ct LU
•-« 2: :z
&4
q:
_i 1—
0
<: <a:
q:
C5 LU
1—
LU
0
192
typical conditions. The method uses simple and commonly available
test equipment.
3. Frequency meter
5. R.F, voltmeter
4.4.6.5. PROCEDURE
1. Measure the selectance as outlined in Section 4.4.1

However, rather than plotting the selectance curve in terms
of voltage gain in decibels versus frequency, plot, on
rectilinear graph paper, the voltage ratio, R(f) , versus
frequency, f.
2. Determine the total area, A, in volts per volt times

hertz, enclosed by the selectance curve.
3. Determine the maximum height, h, in volts per volt, of

the selectance curve.
4. Determine the width, B (N) , in kilohertz or megahertz,

of a rectangle whose height is h and whose total area is A.
B(N) is the noise bandwidth of the receiver.
193
.
1. Record the measurement frequencies in kilohertz or

megahertz.

3. Record the open circuit signal voltages, in microvol

otherwise, at the input terminals of the generator.
4. Record the I.F. output voltages, E^ , in volts.
5. Record the voltage ratios, R(f), as a numeric ratio.
6. Record the area, A, in volts per volt times hertz

(v/v) (Hz)
7. Record the height, h, in volts per volt.
8. Record the calculated value of noise bandwidth,

B(N), in kilohertz or megahertz.

following:
1. Uncertainty, AE^ , in the measured values of E^

'
o o
194
The total relative uncertainty, AB(%), expressed in per-
cent, in the noise bandwidth, B(N)/ is given by the equation
AB (%) = ( ^ X 100 ) +
( ^ X 100
^
,
where AA is the uncertainty in the area, A, and Ah, is the

uncertainty in the height, h. Relative uncertainty AA/A is
given by
Relative uncertainty Ah/h is given by
/AE. AE \
•
h ^ I E. E y
^ 1 o /
Uncertainties AE . and AE are obtained from the manufacturer's

1 o
specifications on the output level indicator of the signal
generator and on the R.F. voltmeter, respectively. Uncertainty
Af is obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on the
frequency meter.
195
. .
4.4.7. DESENSITIZATION
4.4.7.1. DEFINITION
The desensitization of an AM receiver is the input

voltage level from an undesired signal source which, when
present simultaneously with a desired signal source of a
selected level that alone produces reference audio output
power, produces a reduction of 3 dB in the audio output power
as compared with the output in the absence of the undesired
signal
Desensitization in an AM receiver may be a function of

desired signal level. It is usually expressed in decibels
above the desired signal level at which the measurement is
made
4.4.7.2 PURPOSE

desensitization of Ai'4 receivers. Desensitization is a measure
of the extent to which receiver gain is reduced by the
presence of an adjacent undesired signal.
4.4.7.3. METHOD
The method uses two signal generators and a voltmeter or

power meter as shown in figure 4.4.7. The signal generators
supply known input voltages at different frequencies to the
receiver through a combining network. The voltmeter or power
meter measured the receiver output signal level that is
produced under the following two conditions:
The first generator is amplitude modulated and adjusted

(1)
to produce reference audio output power with the second genera-
tor turned off.
196
1
o
t— tr L
1— OR T1 ry rv^
< 1— LU UJ UJ
1—
(/I
h- o O UJ
00 1 Q_ s:
RE OA
TER
X A
o
to
N
UJ O -H
4J
-H
CQ
UJ (U
CO
(U
P
O
ec i-i q;
Q IC O I
-p
UJ (_) S 0)
a- H- I—
cn
s: cc UJ
4J
to
EH
C3
o
H-
UJ
o
o
•H
C4
o
1—
o
_i h-
cC <c cC OvJ
q;
CJ3 UJ UJ
o o
on 21
GE GE
19 7
(2) The second generator is unmodulated and tuned to a
different frequency. Its output level is adjusted until
the audio output power is reduced 3 dB below reference output
power.
The signal level ratio, in decibels, of the two generators

is the desensitization of the receiver.

2 dB under typical conditions. This method uses commonly available
test equipment of moderate sophistication.
. 4.4.7.4. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
2. Variable-frequency CW signal generator
3. Three-port combining network
6a. AF power meter
OR,
6b. A.C. voltmeter
198
4.4.7.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the two SIGNAL GENERATORS to the input port

of the receiver through the COMBINING NETWORK and IMPEDANCE
MATCHING NETWORK as shown in figure 4.4.7. The matching network
is chosen to present the specified source impedance, to ,
the receiver at the measurement frequency, f^. If the output

impedance of the combining network, with signal generators
connected, equals , no matching network is required.
Connect the TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance

2a.
equal to the specified load resistance, R,^ and a power rating ,
in excess of the receiver's rated audio output level, to the

audio output port of the receiver. Connect the A.C. VOLTMETER
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R^^ , to the audio output port
of the receiver.

output power, P^ . The voltage to be measured is given by the
equation
o V o £
OR,

output power, P^.
4. Set the controls as given in Table XXIV.
5. Tune signal generator No. 1 and the receiver to the

199
TABLE XXIV
De sensitization
Control Setting
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. AGC
16 . Meter Switch 16. Optional
200
: .
6. Adjust the amplitude modulation in signal generator

No. 1 to 30% at 1000 Hz.
7. Adjust the output level of signal generator No. 1 to give

the desired input voltage to the receiver. This will normally lie
within the receiver's dynamic range (cf.). A suitable value is
1000 microvolts.
8. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, , in micro-

volts, at the output terminals of the matching network, if used;
otherwise, at the output terminals of the combining network.
9. With the output level of signal generator No. 2 set to

zero, adjust the AF gain control to produce reference audio
output power, .
10. Tune signal generator No. 2 to the desired interference

frequency, f^^.
11. With generator No. 2 unmodulated, and with generator

No. 1 set as given above, adjust the output level of generator
No. 2 to produce 3 dB reduction in the audio output power
obtained in Step 9, above.
12. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^^, in

microvolts, due to generator No. 2, at the output terminals of
the matching network, if used; otherwise, at the output
terminals of the combing network.
13. Calculate the ratio, D, in decibels, by the following

equation
E
D(dB) = 20 log .
îi
D(dB) is the desensi ti zation of the receiver under conditions
of (1) measurement frequency, f^, (2) interference frequency,
f^ , and (3) desired signal level, .
201
:
.

megahertz

3.Record the value of termination resistance, R^, in ohms,

4a. Record the output voltage, , in volts.
OR, "
>
'
"
5. Record the open circuit voltages,

Xr- ^ '
E.
1 1
and E.
12
,
' in
if used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the combining
network.
6. Record the desensitization, D(dB), in decibels.

following
1. Uncertainties, AE 11 and AE.12 . ,

' in the measured values
-
of E. and E.
11 12

'
o o
OR,
2b. Uncertainty, AP^, in the measured value of P^
202
1
The total relative uncertainty, AD(dB) , in decibels, in

the desensitization , D, is given approximately, for small
AD (dB) = 20 log
where
,^ AE. AE. AE
AD _ 1 12 o
D ~ E . E . E
11 12 O
or
AE. AE. AP
AD _ 1 _^
12 _|_
T
1 o
D E . E . 2 P
11 12 o
Uncertainties AE . and AE are obtained from the manufac-

1 1 2
turer ' s specifications on the output level indicator of the

signal generators. Uncertainties AE^ and/or AP^ are obtained
from the manufacturer's specifications on the voltmeter and/or
power meter, respectively.
203
4.4.8. CROSS MODULATION
When cross modulation occurs, the modulation components

of a large undesired signal are transferred to the carrier of
a weak desired signal, and are demodulated along with the
desired signal. Cross modulation may occur at any frequency,
and no particular relationship among the frequencies of the
desired signal, the undesired signal, and the receiver I.F.
amplifier need exist.
a. Cross modulation is a type of intermodulati on due to

modulation of the carrier of the desired signal by an undesired
signal wave. (IEEE Std 100-1972)
b. Cross modulation is the input voltage level from an

undesired signal source which, when present simultaneously
with a desired signal source that alone produces reference
audio output power, produces 1% of reference audio output
power.
4.4.8.2. PURPOSE

cross modulation of an AlA receiver. This characteristic is a
measure of the ability of a receiver to reject an undesired
signal in the presence of, but on a different frequency from,
the desired signal.
4.4.8.3. METHOD
The method uses two amplitude modulated signal generators

and a voltmeter or power meter as shown in figure 4.4.8. The
signal generators supply known input voltages at different
204
(1 1 (
o
1— UJ
h- O
1—
1—
LlJ
a: a:
LU UJ
OO 5: H-
t — — 1 1— O O UJ
e: oo _I D_
RE OA
TER
A o
-p
rtJ
!)
u_ 1—
UJ o
> o
»—
LJJ
s
z
1
o
UJ cC m
>
o
s-i
u
5^
O
M-l
UJ
^Z^
cc 1— q:
Q o
1 I
IE: -P
UJ O 3 a)
a. H
1— -
s: < : UJ
•-> s : ^ +)
CO
<u
Eh
1—1 q:
ô
3
1-1
1—
CQ
s: UJ
o ^
o
o o
— I—
1
• —I I— •
<: <c -— =t ct <NJ

^ q;
o
1—
UJ
o
• CJ3 UJ
1— z: o
^ ^
I 1
UJ OO UJ
205
:
frequencies to the receiver through a combining network. The

voltmeter or power meter measures the receiver output signal
level that is produced under the following two conditions
(1) The first generator is adjusted to produce reference

audio output power with the second generator turned off.
(2) The second generator is tuned to a frequency that

produces a response due to cross modulation. Its level is
adjusted to produce 1% of rated audio output power in the
presence of the first generator's carrier with no modulation
on the first generator.
The open circuit voltage, in microvolts, of the second

generator is the cross modulation of the receiver.
Measurement uncertainties as small as 10% are possible

under best condtions , and range from approximately 12% to 50%
under typical conditions. This method uses rudimentary and
commonly available test equipment.
1. Two amplitude modulated, variable-frequency signal

generators
2 . Three-port combining network
4. Termination resistor for receiver output output port
5a. AF power meter
OR, -
5b. A.C. voltmeter
206
4.4.8.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the two SIGNAL GENERATORS to the input port of

the receiver through the COMBINING NETWORK and IMPEDANCE
is chosen to present the specified source impedance, to ,

impedance of the combining network, witn signal generators
connected, equals Z^, no matching network is required.
2a. Connect the TERI4INATI0N RESISTOR having a resistance

in excess of the receiver's rated audio output level, to the
audio output port of the receiver. Connect the A.C. VOLTMETER
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R^ , to the audio output port
of the receiver.
3 •» Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate the reference

output power, P^. The voltage to be measured is given by tne
equation
E
o
= Wp
V o R.£
OR,
3b. Set the power meter on a range to indicate the

reference output power, P .
o
207
.
4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXV.
5. Tune signal generator No. 1 and the receiver to the

o
6. Adjust the amplitude modulation in signal generator

No. 1 to 30% at 1000 Hz.
Adjust the output level of signal generator No. 1 to

7.
give the desired input voltage to the receiver. This will
normally lie within the receiver's dynamic range (cf.). A value
of 1000 microvolts is suggested.
Determine the open circuit signal voltage,

8. in ,

if used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the combining
network
9. With the output level of signal generator No. 2 set to

zero, adjust the AF gain control to produce reference audio
output power, .
10. Tune signal generator No. 2 to the desired interference

frequency, f^.
11. Adjust the amplitude modulation of generator No. 2
to 30% at 1000 Hz.
12. Adjust generator No. 1 for zero amplitude modulation

(i.e., turn modulation off).
13. With the output level of generator No. 1 still set as

in Step 7, above, but unmodulated, adjust the output level of
generator No. 2 to produce 1% of reference audio output power,
P^ . That is, the output level at this Step, due to generator
No. 2, is 20 dB below the output level obtained in Step 9,
above, due to generator No. 1.
208
TABLE XXV
Cross Modulation
Initial Control Sett ings
Control Setting
4. RF Gain 4. As desired (normally at maximum)
6. AF Gain 6. As required
209
. .

microvolts, due to generator No. 2, at tlie OUTPUT TERMINALS
of the matching network, if used; otherwise at the output
terminals of the combining^ network. E is the cross modulation
c
of the receiver under conditions of (1) measurement frequency,
f^ , (2) interference frequency, f^ , and (3) desired signal
level , E .
1. Record the measurement frequency, f^ in kilohertz

or megahertz, to which the receiver is tuned.
2. Record the interference frequency, f^, in kilohertz

or megahertz

4. Record the value of termination resistance, R^ , in

ohms, connected to receiver output terminals.
5a. Record the output voltage, E^ , in volts
OR,
5b. Record the reference output power, , in watts

microvolts

microvolts
210

following:

c c
2a. Uncertainty,
^
AE , in the measured value of E
o o
OR,

o o
The total relative uncertainty, AE^(%) , in the cross

modulation, E^ , expressed as a percent, is given by the
equations
/ AE t / AE \
AE^ (%) = X 100 j + X 100
j
OR
/ AE \ / \
^
1
iôj •
^^c = ("e; ^ '
j

generator.
^
Uncertainties AE and/or AP are obtained from the
o o
211
4.4.9. ADJACENT CHANNEL SELECTIVITY
4.4.9.1. DEFINITION
Adjacent channel selectivity is the input voltage level

from a signal source in the adjacent channel of an FM receiver
which, when present simultaneously with a signal in the princip
channel that alone produces a 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY (cf.),
degrades the SINAD ratio in the principal channel to 6 dB.
Adjacent channel selectivity is usually expressed in

decibels above the level of the signal in the principal channel
It is also called DESENSITIZATION , referring to FM receivers.
4.4.9.2. PURPOSE

adjacent channel selectivity of an Fi-l receiver. This
characteristic is a measure of the receiver's ability to
deliver an output signal that is degraded a specified
amount (6 dB) below the normally accepted quality in the
presence of a strong adjacent channel signal.
Although this method is described in terms of degradation

caused by an adjacent channel signal, it applies equally well
to a second signal located at an arbitrary frequency.
212
4.4.9.3. METHOD
This method uses two frequency modulated signal generators

and an audio distortion analyzer as shown in figure 4.4.9.
Generator No. 1 is used to measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY
(cf . ) , of the receiver. Then generator No. 2, tuned to an
adjacent channel and modulated with a different audio tone
(400 Hz) , is adjusted to a level sufficient to decrease the
SINAD from 12 dB to 6 dB . The signal level ratio, in decibels,
of the two generators is the desired adjacent channel selectivity
of the receiver.
Measurement uncertainties as small as 0.7 dB are possible under

1. Two frequency modulated, variable-frequency signal

generators
2. Three-port combining network
4.4.9.5. PROCEDURE
Connect the two SIGNAL GENERATORS to the input port of

1.
the receiver through the COMBINING NETWORK and IMPEDANCE

is chosen to present the specified source impedance, Z to ,
213
I1 11
o
HH DC O CC
h- O I— LU
I
I— M
Z 00 OC >-
— I—
I 1 O _J
S 00 1— «a:
DC LU CO z
o
•H
>
•H
-P
O
<D
iH
t— (U
U-
q:
1 I 1
<: o 03
>
—
1
0)
O
LU
1—
Z
o
C
+>
0)
o
nj
•n
LU
O
^^
CD
O
Q IC O
LU 3
C_)
1—
D. 1—
<=c LU p
f-" s: z I
-p
0)
UJ
-P
CQ
<D
EH
1 — DC
z
1—
o IS.
• -
r
CQ 1—
LU
O
o
cc: cc
—I
o _l h-
o
I— • •
=c <: — < <a: CO

2: cc ^ q:
C3 LU •
CD LU •
>— 2: o I— z: o
LU ^ Z
I 1
cy-> 00 LU
CD CD
214
.

impedance of the combining network, with signal generators
connected, equals no matching network is required.
,

equal to the specified load resistance, R, , and a power rating

4. With generator No. 2 turned off, use generator No. 1
to measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY, E^ , as described in

Section 4.1.5.5.
5. Tune signal generator No. 2 to the desired adjacent

channel or other frequency, f^
6. Adjust the frequency modulation of generator No. 2 to

±60% of rated system deviation at (400 Hz). This places the
demodulated audio signal away from the 1000 Hz rejection notch
of the distortion analyzer.
7. Adjust the output level of generator No. 2 to produce

a 6 dB SINAD ratio in the principal channel. Generator No. 1
remains as in Step 2, above, during this time, and the SINAD

ratio is measured using the 1000 Hz rejection filter in the
distortion analyzer.
Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E a in

8. ,
microvolts, due to generator No. 2, at the OUTPUT TERMINALS

of the matching network, if used; otherwise, at the output
terminals of the combining network.
215
. . .
9. Calculate the ratio, R (dB) , in decibels, by the

a
following equation:
E
R (dB) = 20 log =r^
a tj
1
R (dB) is the adjacent channel selectivity of the receiver

a
under conditions of (1) measurement frequency, f^ , (2) adjacent
channel or arbitrary interference frequency, f^ , and (3)
desired signal level equal to the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY, E^

megahertz
2. Record the adjacent channel or arbitrary interference

frequency, f^ , in kilohertz or megahertz.
3. Record the value of source impedance, Z^, in ohms.

connected to receiver input port

connected to receiver output terminals.

microvolts.
7. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E , in

a
microvolts
8. Record adjacent channel selectivity, R (dB) , in

a
decibels.
216
:

following

a a
2. Uncertainty, / in the measured value of
3. Uncertainty, AP^_^^ , in the measured value of '^^j^^
The total relative uncertainty, Ar (dB) , in decibels,

3.
in the ad j acent channel selectivity , R , is given

a
approximately, for small uncertainties, by the equation
AR^ ,dB) = 20 log

/
^
1 . ^ ^
AE
a
.
T
i
AP
o
.
,
i
^
AP
n+d
The uncertainty, AE , is obtained from the manufacturer's

a
generator. Uncertainties AP^ and AP^_^^ are obtained from tl
217
4 . 4 . 10 . INTERIVIODULATION DISTORTION
4.4.10.1. DEFINITION
Intermodulation distortion is non-linear distortion of a

system or transducer characterized by the appearance in the
output of frequencies equal to the sums and differences of
integral multiples of two or more component frequencies present
in the input wave. NOTE: Harmonic components also present in
the output are usually not included as part of the intermodulation
distortion. When harmonics are included, a statement to that
effect should be made. (IEEE Std 100-1972)
Intermodulation distortion is usually expressed as the

ratio, in decibels, of (a) the signal level of one or more
undesired signals to (b) the signal level of the desired signal
under conditions necessary to produce a prescribed receiver
output signal. These conditions vary with type of equipment
and method of measurement, and are specified below.
4.4.10.2 PURPOSE
The purpose of these measurement methods is to measure

the intermodulation distortion of surveillance receivers.
Intermodulation distortion is a measure of the ability of
the receiver to deliver an output signal of acceptable
quality in the presence of other undesired input signals.
4.4.10.3. METHOD I - SINGLE-SIGNAL METHOD, AM OR

FM RECEIVERS
The single-signal method uses a modulated signal generator,

a variable AF band-pass filter, and an A.C. voltmeter, as shown
218
.
in figure 4.4.10.1. The signal generator is modulated vrith two

audio signals having different frequencies and known amplitudes.
The generator supplies a known input voltage to the receiver
at the measurement frequency. The variable band-pass filter
selects the modulation and distortion frequencies, which are
measured with the voltmeter.
In this method, intermodulation distortion is expressed as

a voltage ratio, in decibels, of (a) the rms voltage of each of
the distortion products to (b) the rms voltage of the higher
frequency (reference) audio modulation signal.

under best conditions, and range from 0.8 dB to 3 dB under
typical conditions. This method uses moderately sophisticated
but commonly available test equipment. The intermodulation
distortion of the signal generator must be small so as not to
obscure the intermodulation products generated v/ithin the
receiver

modulation
2. Two audio frequency generators
3. AF combining network
6. Variable audio frequency band pass filter
7. A.C. voltmeter
219
I 1 1
O
I—
00 o
-H
d; CO
o
I
I— o: q; +J
<c \— Q. LjJ u
^ oo U_ 1 I— o
— —
I I I
cC Q _J -p
2: I— en
o; ljj -H
LU on CO Q
c
o
-H
-p
rH
0
g
0)
-p
LL- 1—
> < =>
LxJ
0
—
1
LU 1— o
LlJ
3
I
-P
(U
1: w
+J
LlJ w
0 • 0)
2: 2:
<< •— q:
0 1— r- Eh
1-1 <c
Q 0
'
ni Q a: •
0
LU :s
a. 1— 1—
=3 LU
cC 2:
0
^
S< LU
^
LU
s: 0
CP
o
—I I—
<c < o
CD LU
1—1 :2:
CO LU
CD
o 2:
220
.

the receiver at the measurement frequency f^. If the signal
required

equal to the specified load resistance, R^ , and a power
rating in excess of the receiver's rated audio output power
level, to the audio output port of the receiver.
3. Connect the input port of the AF BAND PASS FILTER

across the termination resistor.
4. Connect the A.C. VOLTMETER to the output port of

the band pass filter.
5. Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate reference

equation
E
O
= VVOX/
P^Ro •
6. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXVI.

8a. If the measurement is to be made on an AM receiver,

adjust AUDIO GENERATOR No. 1 to produce 30% amplitude
modulation at 2500 Hz. Note the setting of the output level
221
TABLE XXVI
Intermodulation Distortion, Method I
Control Setting
Antenna Trimmer 3. Peak
4. RF Gain 4. As desired
5. IF Gain 5. As desired
6 . AF Gain •
6 . As desired
8. Detector Mode 8. AM or FM, as desired

T 1
J. J- . J L •
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . As desired
222
. ,
control on generator No. 1. Then, with audio generator No. 1
turned off, adjust AUDIO GENERATOR No. 2 to produce 30%

amplitude modulation at 300 Hz. Note the setting of the output
level control on generator No. 2.
OR,
8b. If the measurement is to be made on an FM receiver,

adjust audio generator No. 1 to produce frequency modulation of
±60% of rated system deviation at 2500 Hz. Note the setting of
the output level control on generator No. 1. Then, with genera-
tor No. 1 turned off, adjust audio generator No. 2 to produce
frequency modulation at ±60% of rated system deviation at 300 Hz.
Note the setting of the output level control on generator No. 2.
9. Turn audio generator No. 1 back, on so that the signal

generator is modulated with both the 300 and 2500 Hz signals.
10. Adjust the output level of the signal generator to the

value at which the measurement is to be made. Normally, this
will be within the receiver's dynamic range (cf.)

12. With the audio band pass filter tuned to pass the 2500
Hz signal and to attenuate the 300 Hz signal by at least 40 dB
adjust the AF gain control to produce reference output power, P^.
This is indicated by the A.C. voltmeter reading, E^, which should
be E o times the insertion ratio of the filter at 2500 Hz.
13. Record the voltage reading E .
223
14. Adjust the band pass filter to each of the distortion
frequencies, f^, listed in Table XXVII, in turn, and measure
filter output voltage, E^. Adjust the tuning of the filter to
obtain maximum voltage reading at each frequency. It may not
be possible to measure the voltage at every frequency because
some distortion products may be absent or very weak.
TABLE XXVII
Band Pass Filter Frequency, f^
Order of IM Product, n Frequency f (Hz)
1 2500
2 2200
3 1900
4 1600
5 1300
6 1000
7 ,
700
8 400
9 100
Note 1: Table XXVII does not include all of the

frequencies for all of the orders listed;
it includes only those for the first nine
orders that fall below the highest modulation
frequency.
Note 2: Use care to distinguish the IM distortion

products from the harmonic distortion
products, which occur at integral multiples
of 300 Hz.
224
. .
15. Calculate the ratio, R(IM) in decibels, between the

output voltage at 2500 Hz and at each of the distortion
products, E^, by the following equation:
E
RCIMI ^ 20 log ^
E
,
R(IM) is the intermodulation distortion of the receiver at

frequency f^ when the input signal level is E^ microvolts.

or megahertz
2.Record the value of source impedance, Z^, in ohms,


ohms, connected to the receiver output terminals.
4. Record the reference output voltage, E^, in volts.
5. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E_j^, in

microvolts
6. Record the intermodulation distortion frequencies,

f^, in hertz, and their corresponding order, n.
7.Record the measured voltages,

^
E and E of each ,
r ' n
of the measured audio frequencies at the output of the
audio filter.
8.Record the intermodulation distortion, R(IM) , in

decibels, for each of the distortion frequencies, f .
225
The principal sources of error are the uncertainties,

AE and AE , in the measured values of E and E . The
r n r n
total relative measurement error, AR(dB), in decibels,
in the intermodulation distortion, R(IM) , is given
Ar (dB) = 20 log
Uncertainties AE and AE are obtained from the manufacturer's

r n
specifications on the A.C. voltmeter and band pass filter.
4.4.10.4. METHOD II - TWO-SIGNAL METHOD, AM RECEIVER
This method uses three amplitude modulated signal generators

and a voltmeter or power meter as shown in figure 4.4.10.2.
Signal generators No. 1 and No. 2 supply known input voltages at
a variety of frequencies for the measurement of intermodulation
distortion in the receiver. Generator No. 3 is used to adjust
and calibrate the receiver prior to the measurement. The voltmeter
or power meter indicates the receiver output signal level.
The 6 dB SN/N sensitivity of the receiver is measured at

frequency f^ as described in Section 4.1.2. Then, using
generators No. 1 and No. 2 simultaneously, distortion products
are measured by adjusting the generators, as described below,
to the frequencies and signal levels required to produce
intermodulation distortion output power equal to the reference
output power level. Intermodulation distortion is expressed as
the signal levels, in microvolts, required to produce the
specified output power.
226
— 1 — 1 1
o
•— q:
ai
\—
eZ
I
O
1
LU
1
UJ
1 — 1 1— 2:
1—
o o
s: 00
O:^ LU —
LU 0
1— >
H
O
(1)
o
CE
CD
H
+J
^ :^ M
a: 1—1
0
Q in 0 -P
LU 0 3 CO
Q. 1— J— •H
2: cC LU
1 — Q
C
O
•H
p
:=>
O
g
U
(U
+J
a:
LU
—I I—
o o
—I I— •
o
CQ «=t ct 00 < m
1—1z: CJ3 UJ •
q: LU I— SO
OO LU ^
I
<C I— I
CD
0)
W
o
Eh
CD
CN
ZO O
CQ I—
S: LU
OZ
o
•H
o
—I I— • —J \—
O •
cC< .— =C cC C>J
CD LU •
CD LU •
O I— o
^
I
CO LU 00 LU z:
CD CD
227
best conditions and range from approximately 5% to 20% under
/

1. Three signal generators capable of amplitude modulation
2. Signal combining network
3 . Coaxial switch
4. Variable step attenuator
7a. AF power meter
OR,
1.Connect SIGNAL GENERATORS No. 1 and No. 2 to the

receiver through the COMBINING NETWORK, VARIABLE STEP ATTENUATOR,
COAXIAL SWITCH, and IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORK as shown in figure
4.4.10.2. The impedance matching network must provide the specif ie
source impedance, Z^, to the receiver at the measurement frequency
f^. If is equal to the output impedance actually present at
the attenuator output port, no matching network is required.
228
2. Connect SIGNAL GENERATOR No. 3 to the receiver through
the coaxial switch.

VOLTI^TER across the resistor.
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R,^ , to the audio output port
of the receiver.

equation
E^ = V' P
o o £
OR,

output power, P^.
5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXVIII.
6. Turn the coaxial switch to connect generator No. 3
to the impedance matching network.
7. With the output level of generators No. 1 and No. 2
set to zero, tune generator No. 3 and the receiver to the

229
. ..
TABLE XXVIII
Intermodulation Distortion, Methods II and III
Qpi-f- 4-
O <3 L.I Lliy
Ti rr
-i
OdilLl iD WX L-OIi 1 O ^ J_ ^ \Ji
2 2 Xi O O -1- J_ ^ V-l
3 An'hpnrir^
xXJ. L V—
1 i, J. 1 "Pyi
X _l_ -L. ttittipt
LL
J. L U_
L 3 . Peak
4 . RF
X\jL VJJ a i
CI -L n1
i. 4 .
Z\c
O Hpc kl>
-i
_1_
r-prl
J_ Vwl
•J • TF Ha "in 5 .
aq ciesired
6 . j^F Gain 6 . As required
7 . Line Gain 7 Optional
8 . Dpi tp OT" Modp 8 AM
9 . Rp'atc FTPTTiipnov
u \JL. v^ y Osr*!!
»j v^
1- ^ lator
d j_ "".^ 1 1 V-/ -J- -X. v^ j_ 9 , OFF
ijj- O
w T-'^T'prmp'nr'V
j_a_ v-{ c11 y 10 . N A.
.
J L • TF
XI. R^nrlwi
di
XJ W J_ rlf"h
L-l 1 1 11 ô -1- ^
r^J- X) Cli 1 v-l WX L,l 1 12 . As desired
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . MGC
230
8. Adjust the amplitude modulation in generator No. 3
to 30% at 1000 Hz.
9. Set the step attenuator to 10 dB attenuation.
10. With signal generator No. 3 connected and its output

set to zero, adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce
25% of rated audio output power, P^. This will be noise
power only.

reference audio output power, This will be approximately
.
25% noise power and 75% audio signal power (1000 Hz) , and
corresponds to a 6 dB signal-plus-noise-to-noise ratio.

if used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the variable
attenuator.
13. Set the step attenuator to some large value, e.g.,

80 dB.
14. Adjust generator No. 3 to zero output.
15. Turn the coaxial switch to connect the attenuator to

the combining network.
16. Adjust the modulation on generator No. 1 to 30% at

1000 Hz. Leave generator No. 2 unmodulated.
17. Adjust both generator No. and generator No.

1 2 to a
large output level setting, e.g., 100,000 microvolts. Adjust
output levels to produce equal signal levels at the input to
231
.
the step attenuator. This can be done as follows: Adjust

generator No. 2 to the same frequency and modulation conditions
as generator No. 1, and use the receiver to indicate when equal
signal levels are obtained. Then turn off the modulation in
generator No. 2.
18. Adjust generator No. 1 to frequency f that is different

3.
from f but within the range

^
0.5 f to 2 f . Leave the receiver
o o o
tuned to frequency f^.
19. Adjust generator No. 2 to frequency f , where f^^ is

given by one of the entries shown in Table XXIX. The choice of
is determined by which particular intermodulation distortion
product is to be measured. The formula for computing f^^ is the
general equation.
f
o
= m f ± n f ,
b ,
a
where m and n are integers, and the sum, m + n, is the order

of the distortion product (e.g., for m = 1, n = 2, the product
is of third order) .
20. Check to see that the signal levels from the two
generators at the attenuator input are equal.
21. Adjust the step attenuator to produce reference audio

output power. This step is similar to Step 11, above.

microvolts, of either one of the two signals at the OUTPUT
TERMINALS of the matching network, if used; otherwise, at the
output terminals of the variable attenuator. This is the
intermodulation distortion level of the receiver, due to equal
signals at frequencies f^ and f when tuned to frequency f ^
,
232
TABLE XXIX
Frequency f , of Generator No. 2
I M Product Frequency f^^
Second order : f + f
a o
If - f
'
a o
Third order: 2f + f
a o
'a
I
2f - f
o I
^(f + f )
2 a o
2 '
a o '
Fourth order: 3f + f
a o
'a
I
3f - f
o I
T<|2fa-fol'
i-df^ - fol)
Fifth order: 4f + f
a o
|4f - f
'
a o
T<2fa + ô'
i-(|2f^ - f^l)
3 a
'
o
r(f a + f
o
)
T (I f - f )
'
a o I
233
: .

or megahertz


4. Record the reference output power, , in watts

microvolts .

f and f , , in kilohertz or megahertz,
^
a b
7. Record the intermodulation product order, m + n.
8. Record the intermodulation distortion level, E,,

d
in microvolts.

following
Uncertainty, , , in the measured value of E

]_ ^
d

'
o ' o
OR,
234
2b. Uncertainty, AP in the measured value of P
o o
The total relative uncertainty, AE^(%), in the intermodulation

distortion, E expressed as a percent, is given by the equations
,
AE^ (%)
OR
AE^ (%)

4.4.10.5. METHOD III - THREE-SIGNAL METHOD, AM RECEIVER
This method uses four amplitude-modulated signal generators

and a voltmeter or power meter as shown in figure 4.4.10.3.
Signal generators No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3, supply known input
voltages at a variety of frequencies for the measurement of
intermodulation distortion in the receiver. Generator No. 4 is
used to adjust and calibrate the receiver prior to the
measurement. The voltmeter or power meter indicates the receiver
output signal level.
The 6 dB SN/N sensitivity of the receiver is measured at

frequency f^ as described in Section 4.1.2. Then, using
generators No. 1/ No. 2, and No. 3 simultaneously, distortion
products are measured by adjusting the generators as described
below, to the frequencies and signal levels required to produce
235
o
—
rv
1
CC 1 1 1
o
1
1 — 1 rv^
cc 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1
c/0
O O LU
1
— —
1 r 1
\—
^ 00 _J Q.
q: uj
LU cc
O
(—
o
H
4-1
UJ U
o
+J
W
Q nz o H
UJ o Q
Q. 1— 1—
UJ
O
-H
-P
(C
rH
:=i
-p
H
^1
q: 0
UJ o o 14-1
_l f— •
<
<C ZD cc
CD UJ •
q: uj I— 2:
llj
0 1
-p
CD CO
-P
(U
CO
n
—
I
cc
o
o
I
zz
DO I—
^ UJ
o 2:
•H
—J 1—
0 o O
—I h- •
—I I— •
<:
^
< <C CNJ < =1 00
q:
CD UJ
^ ce:
CD UJ CD UJ
>—
1 ^0 1—1 2: O 1— ^ o
00 UJ oo UJ z .
00 UJ
CD CD
236
intermodulation distortion output power equal to the reference
output power level. Intermodulation distortion is expressed as
the signal levels, in microvolts, required to produce the
specified output power.

typical conditions. This method uses simple and commonly
1. Four signal generators capable of amplitude modulation
2. Signal combining network
3. Coaxial switch
4 . Variable step attenuator
7a. AF power meter
OR,
1. Connect SIGNAL GENERATORS No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 to the

receiver through the COMBINING NETWORK, VARIABLE STEP ATTENUATOR,
237
COAXIAL SWITCH, and IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORK as shown in figure
4.4.10.3. The impedance matching network must provide the specified
source impedance, Z^, to the receiver at the measurement frequency,
f^. If is equal to the output impedance actually present at the
attenuator output port, no matching network is required.
2. Connect SIGNAL GENERATOR No. 4 to the receiver through

the coaxial switch.

output port of the receiver. Connect the TRUE RMS VOLTMETER across
the resistor.
OR,

of the receiver.

equation
OR,

output power, P .
o
5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXVIII, p. 230.
238
Turn the coaxial switch to connect generator No.
6. 4 to
the impedance matching network.
7. With the output levels of generators No. 1, No. 2, and

No. 3 set to zero, tune generator No. 4 and the receiver to the
8. Adjust the amplitude modulation in generator No. 4 to

30% at 1000 Hz.
9. Set the step attenuator to 10 dB attenuation.
10. With the signal generator No.

connected and its output
4
set to zero, adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce 25%

of rated audio output power, P^. This will be noise power only.
Ajust the output level of generator No. 4 to give

11.
reference audio output power, This will be approximately
.
25% noise power and 75% audio signal power (1000 Hz) and ,
corresponds to a 6 dB signal-plus-noise-to-noise ratio.
Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^, in

12.
if used; otherwise, at the output terminals of the variable
attenuator.

80 dB.
14. Adjust generator No. 4 to zero output.
Turn the coaxial to connect the attenuator to the

15.
combining network.
239
.
16. Adjust the modulation on generator No. 1 to 30% at

100 0 Hz. Leave generators No. 2 and No. 3 unmodulated.
17. Adjust generators No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 to a large

output level setting, e.g., 100,000 microvolts. Adjust output
levels to produce equal signal levels at the input to the step
attenuator. Adjust generators No.
This can be done as follows:
2 and No. 3 to the same frequency and modulation conditions as
generator No. 1, and use the receiver to indicate when equal

signal levels are obtained. Then turn off the modulation in
generators No. 2 and No. 3.
Adjust generator No. 1 to frequency

18. f that is different
3.
from f but within the range 0.5 f to 2 f . Leave the receiver

o o o
tuned to frequency f .
o
19. Adjust generator No. 2 to frequency and generator

No. 3 to frequency f^, where fj_^ and
ar f^ are given by one of the
solutions to the general equation
f
o
=mf a ±nf,b ±pf.
^ c
The factors m, n, and p are integers, and the sum, m + n + p,

is the order of the distortion product (e.g., for m = 1, n = 1,
and p = 3, the product is of fifth order).
20. Check to see that the signal levels from the three
generators at the attenuator input are equal
Adjust the step attenuator to produce reference audio

21.
output power. This step is similar to Step 11, above.
240
. . '
Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^, in

22.
microvolts, of any one of the three signals at the OUfPUT
intermodulation distortion level of the receiver, due to
equal signals at frequencies f^, f^, and f^, when tuned to
frequency f^.
1.Record the measurement frequency, f^, in kilohertz

or megahertz
Record the value of source impedance, Z^, in ohms,

2.
Record the value of termination resistance,

3. R^^ , in
Record the open circuit signal voltage, E^, in

5.
microvolts

f^, fj_^, and f^, in kilohertz or megahertz.
7. Record the intermodulation product order, m + n + p,
8. Record the intermodulation distortion level, E.,, in

d
microvolts
241
4.4.10.5.4. MEASUREiyiENT ERRORS

following:
1. Uncertainty, AE,, in the measured value of E

d d
.,

o' o
OR,

o o
The total relative uncertainty, AE^(%), in the intermodulation

distortion, E^, expressed as a percent, is given by the
equations
AE^ (%) = X 100^ + X lOo) ,
OR

generator. Uncertainties AE and/or AP are obtained from the
oo
242
4.4.10.6. METHOD IV - THREE-SIGNAL METHOD, FM RECEIVER
This method uses three signal generators and a distortion

analyzer as shown in figure 4.4.10.4. One signal generator is
frequency modulated; all three supply known input voltages at
a variety of selected frequencies. The distortion analyzer measures
the output SINAD ratio under various input signal conditions.
The 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY of the receiver is measured

at frequency f^ as described in Section 4.1.5. Then, using all
three generators simultaneously, distortion products are
measured by adjusting the generators, as described below, to tne
frequencies and signal levels required to produce intermodulation
distortion products having a 12 dB SINAD ratio. Intermodulation
distortion is expressed as the signal levels, in microvolts,
required to produce a 12 dB output SINAD ratio.

1. Three signal generators capable of frequency modulation
2 . Signal combining network
3. Variable step attenuator
243
I
o
I— Dc: o cc
o
I
I— I—IUJ
<c I— I— 1^
Cd >-
— »— O _J

H
Cd LU
LU
Q o
+>
c
o
O h- H
4-)
DC <X. O CJ) CD
^ 2: o
+J
<; 1— cc:
o
I
Q ic M
UJ c_j
a- I— I—
3 Q
UJ ^ <: UJ
G
O
H
4->
(0
<-{
Ti
o
fi
u
0)
+J
a
M
UJ o u
—I I—
CO <=C mo
cc ZD
cc: UJ ^3
cc I— I
-P
(U
w
•p
— q:I
ô
•— o
' Zi:
CQ I— rH
2: UJ
OZ
CD
•H
fa
—1 1—
o —I I—
o • 11—
0 •
cC CC •< ct CM <: cC ro
2: ce: D::
CD UJ CD UJ CD UJ •
^0
00 UJ C/) UJ ^ UJ ^
CJD CD CD
244
1. Connect SIGNAL GENERATORS No. 1, NO. 2, and No. 3 to

the receiver through the COMBINING NETWORK, VARIABLE STEP ATTENUATOR,
and IMPEDANCE lÎATCHING NETWORK as shown in figure 4.4.10.4. The
impedance matching network must provide the specified source
impedance, Z^, to the receiver at tne measurement frequency, f^.
If is equal to the output impedance actually present at tne
attenuator output port, no matching network is required.

equal to the specified load resistance, R. , and a power
rating in excess of the receiver's rated audio output power level,
to the audio output port of the receiver. Connect the audio

4. Set the receiver controls as given in Table XXX.
5. Set the step attenuator to minimum attenuation.
6. With the output levels of generators No. 2 and No. 3

set to zero, tune signal generator No. 1 and the receiver to
the measurement frequency, f .
o
7. Adjust the frequency modulation in generator No. 1
to =60% of rated system deviation at 1000 Hz.
8. Measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY, E^, as outlined

in Section 4.1.5.5.

80 dB.
245
TABLE XXX
Intermodulation Distortion, Method IV
Control Q o -h +- n T-i rr
± . Band Switch 1
z . Frequency Tuning 2 iAO O _L J_ ti
o
Antenna Trimmer ir dJs.
4 RF Gain 4 PlciXX lllLllll
c
3 . IF Gain 5. M^vi mmn
ilCl^XlllLilll
0 . AF Gain 6. 7\ C? "K* ITT V*
7 Line Gain 7. \jy> J-\J llci 1.
D
O • Detector Mode 8. FM
Q
y . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9.
BFO Frequency 10 . LN • /A. •
XX . IF Bandwidth 11.
Xz . AF Bandwidth 12. As desired
XJ . Noise Limiter 13. OFF
246
Adjust the generators No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 to a
10.
large output level setting, e.g., 100,000 microvolts. Adjust
output levels to produce equal signal levels at the input to
tne step attenuator. This can be done as follows: Adjust
generators No. 2 and No. 3 to the same frequency and
modulation conditions as generator No. 1, and use the
receiver to indicate when equal signal levels are obtained.
Then turn off the modulation in generators No. 2 and No. 3.
11. Adjust generator No. 1 to frequency f that is different

from f but within the range
^
0.5 f to 2 f . Leave the receiver
o o o
tuned to frequency f^.
12. Adjust generator No. 2 to frequency f^^ and generator

No. 3 to frequency f^, where f^ and f^ are given by one of
the solutions to the general equation
f
o
=mf a ±nf,b ±pf.
^ c
The factors m, n, and p are integers, and the sum^ m + n = p,

is the order of the distortion product (e.g., for m = 1/ n = 1/
and p = 3, the product is of fifth order) .
13. Check to see that the signal levels from the three
generators at the attenuator input are equal.
14. Adjust the step attenuator to produce 12 dB SINAD ratio.
Detemnine the open circuit signal voltage, E^, in

15.
microvolts, of any one of the three signals at the OUTPUT
intermodulation distortion level of tne receiver, due to equal
signals at frequencies f f f when tuned to frequency f
, , , , .
247
: . ,
Record the measurement frequency, f^, in kilohertz

1.
or megahertz
Record the value of source impedance, Z^, in ohms,

2.

in ohms, connected to the receiver output terminals.
5. Record the open circuit signal voltage, E_j^, in

microvolts.

f , f, , and f , in kilohertz or megahertz,
^
a b c
7. Record the intermodulation product order, m + n + p,
8. Record the intermodulation distortion level, E,, in

d
microvolts.

following
1. Uncertainty, Ê^, in the measured value of E^
2. Uncertainty, AP^, in thy measured value of P^
3. Uncertainty, '^Pj^+j^^ measured value of P^^^^
248
The total relative uncertainty, lE^{%) , in the intermodulation
distortion, E^, expressed as a percent, is given by the
equation
The uncertainty, Ê^, is obtained from the manufacturer's

generator. Uncertainties ilP are obtained from the
and iP
^ o n+d ,
249
4.4.11. IMPULSE BANDWIDTH
The impulse bandwidth of a receiver is the ratio of (a)
the peak voltage response, E , of the receiver to (b ) twice

P
the gain-spectral intensity product, 2GS , where G is the
receiver voltage gain from input terminals to demodulator
input and S is the spectral intensity of the impulse input
signal . .
- -
This is an operational definition of impulse bandwidth

rather than a descriptive definition. A descriptive
definition, based upon fundamental considerations, has not
yet been derived. As a consequence, the method of measuring
impulse bandwidth does not follow steps that have an obvious
relationship to bandwidth.
4.4.11.2. PURPOSE

impulse bandwidth of a receiver. Impulse bandwidth is a
measure of the degree of distortion (time dispersion) suffere
by an impulsive signal as it passes through the receiver. It
is useful in predicting the interference susceptibility of
the receiver to impulsive signals.
The method given below is useful only for receivers that

have nearly synchronously-tuned tuned circuits with
near-Gaussian selectance. Field intensity meters are usually
designed this way^ whereas other types of receivers often
are not. Receivers with sharp filters (e.g., resonant crystal
filters), and with rectangular passbands (e.g., mechanical
and/or crystal lattice filters) will produce a response to
impulses that is unsuitable for calculating impulse bandwidth
by this method.
250
4.4.11.3. METHOD
The method uses an impulse generator and an oscilloscope

as shown in figure 4.4.11.1. The impulse generator supplies a
periodic train of very narrow pulses to the receiver. The
oscilloscope displays the I.F. output voltage response.
Impulse bandwidth is determined by (1) dividing the total
area enclosed by the envelope of the oscilloscope display
by the maximum total height of the display to obtain an
effective length of the pattern, (2) converting this effective
length to time duration of the response, and (3) taking the
reciprocal of this time duration, which is impulse bandwidth.
This method requires that the repetition rate of the

impulse generator be no greater than one-fifth of the CW
bandwidth of the receiver.

1. Wide-band impulse generator
2. 20 dB attenuator or lossy impedance matching network
3. Cathode-ray oscilloscope (delayed or expandable sweep

is helpful)
251
1 t
LL.
1—
cc
UJ
o
>
—
(
E
C
LU I—
ai
CQ f—
o
T3 <: UJ
=)
O LU
CD
1—
1—
<
252
.
4.4.11.5. PROCEDURE

port of the IMPULSE GENERATOR through a 20 dB resistive attenu-
ator whose characteristic impedance equals that of the specified
source impedance, Z^. If the load impedance required by the
impulse generator does not equal the characteristic impedance of
the attenuator, provide a proper RESISTIVE MATCHING NETWORK
between generator and attenuator.
2. Connect the vertical input port of the OSCILLOSCOPE

to the output of the last linear I.F. amplifier of the receiver.
3. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXI.
5. Adjust the output level of the generator to 80 dB

above 1 microvolt per megahertz.
6. Adjust the repetition rate of the generator, if adjust-

able, to between 100 and 1000 pulses per second. The repetition
rate must be no less than one-fifth the receiver CW bandwidth (cf.!
7. Adjust the oscilloscope to obtain a pattern that fills the

calibrated area on the screen. Adjust the horizontal sweep to a
convenient, known value. Adjust the trigger circuit to obtain a
stable display.
8. Photograph the display, or trace its outline on a sheet

of transparent material.
9. Determine the total area, A, in square centimeters,

enclosed by the pattern. Use a planimeter, or count squares, or
use whatever other means are available.
253
TABLE XXXI
Impulse Bandwidth
Control Setting
4. RF Gain 4. Medium
5. IF Gain 5 . Medium
6. AF Gain 6 . Optional
8. Detector Mode '
8. Optional
12 . AF Bandwidth 12. Optional
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. MGC
254
255
.: . *
10. Determine the height, h, in centimeters, of the pattern

between the points at which the height is maximum (see figure
4.4.11.2. )
11. Determine the horizontal scale factor, T, in seconds

per centimeter, from the sweep speed calibration of the
oscilloscope.
12. Compute the impulse bandwidth, B(Imp) , in kilohertz,

by the following equation
h (cm) X 10"^
B ,-r ^
(Imp) =
Aicm^) X T (sec/cm)

or megahertz.
2. Record the output level setting, in decibels above 1
microvolt per megahertz, of the impulse generator.
3. Record the horizontal sweep rate, T, in seconds per

centimeter of the oscilloscope.
4. Record the area. A, in square centimeters, and height,

h, in centimeters, of the oscilloscope pattern.
5. Record the impulse bandwidth, B(Imp) in hertz or

kilohertz

following
1. Uncertainty, AA, in the measured value of area, A
256
2. Uncertainty, Ah, in the measured value of height, h
3. Uncertainty, AT, in the horizontal scale factor, T
The total relative uncertainty, AB(%), expressed in

percent, in the impulse bandwidth, B{Imp), is given by
the equation
AB
Uncertainties AA and Ah are obtained by estimating the

reading resolution of the scope display. Uncertainty AT is
obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on the sweep
circuit of the oscilloscope.
257
4.5. INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY
The interference susceptibility of a receiver is a measure

of its ability to withstand the effects of undesired signals
and noise that tend to interfere with reception of desired
signals. To express this ability in quantitative terms,
interference susceptibility is broadly defined as the smallest
undesired signal level necessary to produce a specified
degradation in the desired demodulated signal from the receiver.
Normally, a receiver is susceptible to interfering signals

by two mechanisms: conduction and radiation. Measurement
methods for conducted interference are generally similar to
other methods given in this handbook. However, presently
available methods for measuring radiated interference are
generally inadequate or worthless because of the large
inaccuracies and variations of results that they provide. The
meaningful measurement of radiated interference susceptibility
requires a knowledge of the electric and magnetic fields at,
and in the presence of, the receiver. Present methods for
determining such fields throughout the frequency range covered
by this handbook have errors that typically range from 100% to
500%, and may reach 1000% or higher, depending upon the
circumstances. Measurements in shielded enclosures, as presently
practiced, are essentially meaningless because of the large
standing waves usually present. Adequate anechoic chambers are
not yet developed for frequencies below 10 0 MHz. Parallel-plate
configurations give satisfactory results only at very low
frequencies, and coaxial line enclosures are similarly limited.
Open-field arrangements are usually not practical because of
the space, power, and interference problems. But underlying
all of these configuration problems is the lack of basic
techniques for determining the strength of perturbed near fields
with adequate accuracy.
258
.
4.5.1. CONDUCTED INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF A

NOISE-LIMITED AM RECEIVER
4.5.1.1. DEFINITION
Conducted interference susceptibility of an AM receiver is

the voltage, in microvolts, of a signal that is amplitude
modulated 30% with a 10 00 Hz sinusoid, which when applied to
a specified pair of receiver terminals, will produce a SINAD
ratio of 16 (12 dB) at the reference audio output power from
the receiver output terminals.
4.5.1.2. PURPOSE

conducted interference susceptibility of noise-limited AM
receivers. For such receivers, conducted interference
susceptibility is a measure of the receiver response to signals
that are conducted into the receiver by paths other than via
the antenna terminals. Such paths include power, audio, and
control line connections
259
4.5.1.3. METHOD
The method uses an amplitude modulated signal generator, an

insertion network and an audio distortion analyzer as
shown in figure 4.5.1. A separate measurement is made at each
accessible line terminal. The generator supplies a known input
voltage to the selected terminal at the measurement frequency
through the insertion network. The distortion analyzer
measures the audio output power from the receiver under two
conditions; viz., (a) with the 1000 Hz modulating signal present,
and with the 1000 Hz modulating signal filtered from the
(b)
audio output power. The generator level is adjusted to the

voltage that causes the ratio of (a) to (b) above, expressed
,
in decibels, to be 12 dB. This voltage is the conducted

interference susceptibility of the selected terminal of the
receiver.

5 . Input termination
6 . Insertion network
7. R.F. voltmeter
260
'.
I
o
M DC
I— o
+J
q: uj
o^
I—.
•H
rH
•H
X!
•H
-P
CD
O
W
P
CO
x
0)
o
^ <c c:
cc:_i <u
Ll_ I— O O
I— Q- u
cC ^ O c_) oo
<u
O ZD h- LU I—
Q
on
(D
4J
Ci
O O—
Cd ZD
H
_^
^
O I— (_) T5
1— 2: q;
o O I— 0)
4J
O
J3
_^ O
UJ
q:
3 ID o
o 1—00 o
T o
<4-(
a
I
+)
(1)
-21 ^ w
cj: d;
Q :^ o +J
UJ c_) 3 CO
D- h- I— (U
^ -a; UJ
Eh
in
y
1 CP
-H
Em
0
1 I—
<c
C3 UJ
UJ
C3
261
.
4.5.1.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the output port of an INSERTION NETWORK,

whose characteristics are suitable for the measurement (see
Section 5.2.7.) to the selected receiver terminal at which the
,
measurement is to be made (power line, audio line, control

line, AGC line, etc.). Refer to figure 4.5.1. for connection
arrangements



5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXII.


to 30% at 1000 Hz.
8. Measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY, E,, as outlined

1
in Section 4.1.3.5.
262
TABLE XXXII
Conducted and Radiated Interference Susceptibility (AM)
Control Setting
3. Antenna Trimmer 3 . Peak
263
.
9 . Disconnect the signal generator from the impedance

transformer at the receiver input port, and connect the
TERMINATION, Z^, in its place.
Connect the signal generator to the input port of the

10.
insertion network at the selected receiver terminal.
11. Set the generator output level to maximum (e.g.,

100,000 to 1,000,000 microvolts),
Vary the generator frequency to cover all frequencies

12.
of interest, including f^ and spurious response frequencies
(cf . )
13. When a response is produced, adjust the generator output

level to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio at reference audio output
power
^ , P .
o
Note: If the generator output level is not large enough

to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio, do one of the
following things:
(1) Insert a power amplifier between the generator

output port and the insertion network input
port. Choose an amplifier with sufficient gain and
power capability to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio.
(2) Adjust the voltage gain of the insertion

network as necessary to allow a 12 dB SINAD
ratio to be reached.
(3) If (1) or (2) do not work, or if they would

produce voltages that would cause equipment failure,
stop the procedure at this point.
264
.
14. Measure the signal frequency, f^ , in kilohertz or

megahertz, and voltage , in microvolts, at the selected
receiver terminal with an R.F. VOLTMETER. This voltage is
the conducted interference susceptibility of the selected
terminal at receiver frequency, f^ , and interference
frequency , f _. .
Note: If the test was stopped as per (3) under

Step 13, determine the signal voltage, E ,
m
at the selected terminal and report the
results as follows: "The conducted inter-
ference susceptibility is in excess of
(E ) microvolts."
m

or megahertz.


5. Record the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity, E^ , in microvolts
6. Record the interference frequency, f^ , in kilohertz

or megahertz.
7. Record the interference susceptibilitv voltage, E^

or E , in microvolts
m
8. Record the selected receiver terminal at which f .
:
and E. are determined.
J
265
: ,

following
: :

o o

n+d n+d
,
The total relative uncertainty, AE^ (%) , expressed in

percent, in the conducted interference susceptibility, E^

specifications on the R.F. voltmeter. Uncertainties AP and
o
AP are obtained from th e manufacturer's specifications on
,
n+d
,
the distortion analyzer.
266
4.5.2. CONDUCTED INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF
AN FM RECEIVER WITH ONE OR MORE LIMITERS
4.5.2.1. DEFINITION
Conducted interference susceptibility of an FM receiver is

the voltage, in microvolts, of a signal that is frequency
modulated ±60% of maximum rated system deviation with a 1000 Hz
sinusoid, which, when applied to a specified pair of receiver
terminals, will produce a SINAD ratio of 16 (12 dB) at the
reference audio output power from the receiver output terminals.
4.5.2.2. PURPOSE

conducted interference susceptibility of FM receivers containing
one or more amplitude limiter stages preceding the FM demodulator
circuit. For such receivers, conducted interference susceptibility
is a measure of the receiver response to signals that are conducted
into the receiver by paths other than via the antenna terminals.
Such paths include power, audio, and control line connections.
4.5.2.3. METHOD
The method uses a frequency modulated signal generator, an

insertion transformer, and an audio distortion analyzer as
shown in figure 4.5.2. A separate measurement is made at each
accessible line terminal. The generator supplies a known input
voltage to the selected terminal at the measurement frequency
through the insertion transformer. The distortion analyzer
and (b) with the 1000 Hz modulating signal filtered from the
audio output power. The generator level is adjusted to the
267
—
o
q;
1 0
cC 1—
2: 00
CO
cn LlJ
LU o
1—
1— cc
en o >1
UJ 3 -p
H
OO 1—
H
•H
XI
•H
+J
0)
O
(0
Y ZD CC
q: —I
?3
W
u_ I— o O
1— Q-
(_) 00 a)
O ZD h- LU ^ o
Q O- Q a
t/1 0)
0)
IW
o
en
(1)
+j
o o c;
H
UJ
(U
-p
o
o
c:
o
o
u.
o
M-r
O CJ3
s: ;3
et 1— q:
Q o
1
UJ o 3 -P
Q- I— I— (U
2: <C UJ w
-p
Ul
(D
Eh
y V
CM
1 IT)
a:
0
_i 1—
«a:
UJ
UJ
CJ3
268
. .
voltage that causes the ratio of (a) to (b) above, expressed

,
in decibels, to be 12 dB. This voltage is the conducted

interference susceptibility of the selected terminal of the
receiver

5. Input termination
6 . Insertion network
7 . R F
. . vo 1 tme te r
4.5.2.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the output port of an INSERTION NETWORK

whose characteristics are suitable for the measurement (see
Section 5.2)^ to the selected receiver terminal at which the
measurement is to be made (power line, audio line, control
line, AGC line, etc.). Refer to figure 4.5.2. for connection
arrangements
269
.
2. Connect t±ie input port of the receiver to the output

generator output impedance equals , no matching network is
required.

equal to the specified load resistance, R^ and a power rating
,


rated output power, P^. ,
5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXIII.

7. Adjust the frequency modulation in the signal generator

8. Measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY, E^ , as outlined

in Section 4.1.5.5.
9 Disconnect the signal generator from the impedance

.
transformer at the receiver input port, and connect the

TERMINATION, Z^ , in its place.
10 Connect the signal generator level to the input port

.
of the insertion network.
11. Set the generator output level to maximum (e.g.,

100,000 to 1,000,000 microvolts).
270
TABLE XXXIII
Conducted and Radiated Interference Susceptibility (FM)
Control Setting
5 . IF Gain 5. Maximum

8. Detector Mode 8. FM
15 . AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. As desired
271
12. Vary the generator frequency to cover all frequencies of
interest, including f^ and spurious response frequencies (cf.).
13. When a response is produced, adjust the generator output

level to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio at reference audio output
power P
, .
o
Note: If the generator output level is not large

enough to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio, do
one of the following things:

output port and the insertion network input port.
Choose an amplifier with sufficient gain and power
capability to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio.
(2) Adjust the voltage gain of the insertion network

as necessary to allow a 12 dB SINAD ratio to be reached,
(3) If (1) or (2) do not work, or if they would

produce voltages that would cause equipment
failure, stop the procedure at this point.
14. Measure the signal frequency, f^ , in kilohertz or

megahertz, and voltage E ^ , in microvolts, at the selected
receiver terminal with an R.F. VOLTMETER. This voltage is
the conducted interference susceptibility of the selected
terminal at receiver frequency, f^ , and interference
frequency , f _. .
Note: If the test was stopped as per (3) under

Step 13, determine the signal voltage, E^,
at the selected terminal and report the
results as follows: "The conducted
interference susceptibility is in excess
of (E ) microvolts."
m
272
: . . .

megahertz

3. Record the value of termination resistance, R|^ , in

ohms , connected to receiver audio output terminals
Record the reference output power, , in watts
5. Record the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity, , in

microvolts

or megahertz
7. Record the interference susceptibility voltage, E_.
or E , in microvolts.
m
8. Record the selected receiver terminal at which f

D
and E. are determined.
D

following
: :

'
o o
3. Uncertainty, AP -,
, in the measured value of P
^ n+d ,
n+d ,
273
The total relative uncertainty, AE^ (%) , expressed in
percent, in the conducted interference susceptibility/ E_.
AE . (%) 100
The uncertainty, AE .
, is obtained from the manufacturer's
:
specifications
^ on the R.F. voltmeter. Uncertainties AP and
o
AP
n+d are obtained from the manufacturer's specifications on
the distortion analyzer.
274
4.5.3. RADIATED INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF A
NOISE-LIMITED AM RECEIVER
4.5.3.1. DEFINITION
Radiated interference susceptibility of an AM receiver is

the field strength, in volts per meter, of an electromagnetic
field that is amplitude modulated 30% v/ith a 1000 Hz sinusoid,
which, when incident upon the most receptive region of the
receiver, v.'ill produce a SINAD ratio of 16 (12 dB) at the rated
audio output pov/er from the receiver output terminals .
4.5.3.2. PURPOSE

radiated interference susceptibility of noise-limited AM
receivers. For such receivers, radiated interference susceptibility
is a measure of the receiver response to radiated electromagnetic
fields that produce signals in the receiver by paths other than
via the receiver antenna. Such paths include pov7er cords, audio
and control lines, and leakage paths through openings in the
receiver enclosure.
Note: The method given belov: is only indicative of

the basic principle of measurement. It is not
given as a recommended method that v/ill give
accurate results . See the discussion given
under Section 4.5.
275
.
4.5.3.3. METHOD
The method uses an amplitude modulated signal generator, an

antenna, and an audio distortion analyzer as shown in figure
4.5.3. The generator and antenna produce a known radiation field
strength at the measurement frequency. The distortion analyzer
audio output power. The radiated field strength is adjusted to
a level that causes the ratio of (a) to (b) , above, expressed
in decibels, to be 12 dB. This field strength is the radiated
interference susceptibility of the receiver.
Measurement uncertainties are seldom less than 200%, and

may be as great as 1000% under typical conditions. The method
uses commonly available test equipment of moderate
sophistication
5. Input termination (shielded)
6 . Antenna
276
I I
o
t— O ai
I— o —
I I LU >1
+J
<; t— I—
^ I/O CCL >- -H
f— — 1 1
O _J r-\
^ oo I— eC -H
X»
Cd UJ
uj •-' -< •H
Q -P
CU
O
tn
:=!
CO
o
Q)
cc ZD 5-1
LU O (U
14-1
S-l
(D
o I—
UJ z
+J
C
Q
CD
-P
fd
-H
'd
5-1
2: z: o
<; p-H q;
Q 3: o
LlJ (_) 3
Cl- I— I— d
^ CC LU I
4->
(U
cn
+j
I tn
cu
a:
o
-H
CJ3
277
4.5.3.5. PROCEDURE

,
at the measurement frequency, f^ . If the signal generator

output impedance equals , no matching network is required.

of the receiver's rated audio output level, to the audio output
port of the receiver. Connect the audio DISTORTION ANALYZER

4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXII, p. 263.


to 30% at 1000 Hz.

in Section 4.1.3.5.
8. Disconnect the signal generator from the impedance

transformer at the receiver input port, and connect the SHIELDED
TERMINATION, Zg / in its place.
9 . Connect the signal generator to the terminals of the

ANTENNA.
278
:
10. Set the generator output level to maximum (e.g., 100,000

to 1,000,000 microvolts).
11. With the antenna approximately 30 meters from the

receiver, vary the generator frequency to cover all frequencies
of interest, including f^ and spurious response frequencies (cf.).
When a a response is produced, adjust the orientation of

12.
the receiver for maximum response, keeping the antenna 30 meters
from the receiver at the closest point.
13. Adjust the generator output level to produce a 12 dB

SINAD ratio.
Note: If the radiated field strength is not large

enough to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio, do one
of the following things
(1) Move the antenna closer to receiver.

output port and the antenna terminals . Choose an
amplifier with sufficient gain and power capability
to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio.
14. Determine the signal frequency, f^ , and field strength,

Ej , in volts per meter, at the location of the receiver by standard
techniques. This field strength is the radiated interference
susceptibility of the receiver for receiver frequency, f^, and
interference frequency, f..
279
. .

megahertz


5. Record the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity, E^ , in

microvolts
6. Record the antenna-to-receiver distance.

or megahertz.
8. Record the radiated interference susceptibility field

strength, E_, , in volts per meter.
Measurement uncertainties depend upon local circumstances

and are difficult to predict for the general case. See discussion
given under Section 4.5.
280
. .
4.5.4. RADIATED INTERFERENCE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF

AN FM RECEIVER WITH ONE OR MORE LIMITERS
4.5.4.1. DEFINITION
Radiated interference susceptibility of an FM receiver is

! the field strength, in volts per meter, of an electromagnetic
:, field that is frequency modulated ± 60% of maximum rated system
deviation with a 1000 Hz sinusoid, which, when incident upon the
most receptive region of the receiver, will produce a SINAD
ratio of 16 (12 dB) at the rated output power from the receiver
output terminals
4.5.4.2. PURPOSE

radiated interference susceptibility of FM receivers containing
one or more amplitude limiter stages preceding the FM demodulator
circuit. For such receivers, radiated interference susceptibility
is a measure of the receiver response to radiated electromagnetic
fields that produce signals in the receiver by paths other than
via the receiver antenna. Such paths include power cords, audio
and control lines , and leakage paths through openings in the
receiver enclosure.
Note: The method given below is only indicative of the

basic principle of measurement. It is not given as
a recommended method that will give accurate results
See the discussion given under Section 4.5.
281
4.5.4.3. METHOD
The method uses a frequency modulated signal generator, an

antenna, and an audio distortion analyzer as shown in figure
4.5.4. The generator and antenna produce a known radiation field
strength at the measurement frequency. The distortion analyzer
audio output power. The radiated field strength is adjusted to
a level that causes the ratio of (a) to (b) , above, expressed
in decibels, to be 12 dB. This field strength is the radiated
interference susceptibility of the receiver.
Measurement uncertainties are seldom less than 200%, and

uses commonly available test equipment of moderate sophistication.
1. ^
Signal generator capable of frequency modulation
5. Input termination
6 . Antenna
282
H
o 2r
OR
o >1
t—
h- 1— ZE -H
>-
I—
oo TO AL
LlJ H
+J
TER
Q
0)
O
[0
d
w
<D
O
OJ
5-1
D: eC ZD 0)
UJ O
^
0)
-P
C!
H
Q
(1)
+J
(0
-H
13
cd
ffi
-P
(U
03
P
W
<u
a:
o
1—
1
<=t
q:
C3 UJ
-rH
UJ
CD
283
4.5.4.5. PROCEDURE

required.
,2. Connect the TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance

DISTORTION ANALYZER across the resistor.

4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXIII, p. 271.

6. Adjust the receiver modulation in the signal generator


in Section 4.1.5.5.
8. Disconnect the signal generator from the impedance

transformer at the receiver input port, and connect the SHIELDED
TERMINATION, Z^, in its place.
9. Connect the signal generator to the ANTENNA terminals.
10-. Set the generator output level to maximum (e.g.,

100,000 to 1,000,000 microvolts).
284
. .
11. with the antenna approximately 30 meters from the

receiver, vary the generator frequency to cover all frequencies
of interest, including f^ and spurious response frequencies
(cf .) .
12. When a response is produced, adjust the orientation of

the receiver for maximum, response, keeping the antenna 30 meters
from the receiver at the closest point.
13. Adjust the generator output level to produce a 12 dB

SINAD ratio.
Note: If the radiated field strength is not large

enough to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio, do one
of the follo\ving things:
(1) Move the antenna closer to receiver.
(2) Insert a povrer amplifier betvreen the generator output port

and the antenna terminals. Choose an amplifier v.'ith sufficient
gain and povrer capability to produce a 12 dB SINAD ratio.
14. Determine the signal frequency, f., and field strength,

E_. , in volts per meter, at the location of the receiver. This
field strength is the radiated interference susceptibility of
the receiver for receiver freauency, f , and interference
frequency , f^
1. Record the measurem.ent frequency, f^ , in kilohertz or

megahertz

285
.
3. Record the value of termination resistance, , in

5. Record the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity, E. , in

microvolts
6. Record the antenna-to-receiver distance

or megahertz.
'
8. Record the radiated interference susceptibility field
strength, E_. , in volts per meter.

and are difficult to predict for the general case. See
discussion given under Section 4.5.
286
.
4.6. EMISSION
Energy from internal signal sources within a receiver may

produce undesired emissions, either conducted or radiated, via
the receiver's antenna, power cord, audio cables, and control
cables. Potential sources of this energy are (1) oscillators
used for frequency conversion, (2) beat frequency oscillators,
(3) oscillators used for synchronous detection, (4) converter-
type power supplies, and (5) spurious oscillations from unstable
circuits
Measurement methods for conducted emission are generally

sim.ilar to other methods given in this handbook. However,
presently available methods for measuring radiated emission
are generally inadequate or worthless because of the large
inaccuracies and variations of results that they provide.
Errors typically range from 100% to 500%, and may reach 1000%
or higher, depending upon the circumstances. Measurem.ents in
shielded enclosures, as presently practiced, are essentially
meaningless because of the large standing waves usually
present. Adequate anechoic chambers are not yet developed
for frequencies below 100 MKz. Open-field arrangements are
usually not practical because of the space, power, and inter-
ference problemiS . But underlying all of these configuration
problems is the lack of basic techniques for determining the
strength of perturbed near fields v;ith adequate accuracy.
4.6.1. CONDUCTED EMISSION
4.6.1.1. DEFINITION
Conducted emission is electromagnetic energy that is

propagated along a conductor.
287
Conducted emission is usually expressed as the power,
in dBm, available from specified receiver terminals.
4.6.1.2. PURPOSE

radio frequency power that is available at each of the
receiver's accessible terminals, and which is generated by
sources within the receiver. This power may be radiated or
otherwise conveyed from the receiver to other electronic
devices, causing undesired interference.
288
. .
4.6.1.3. METHOD
The method uses a sensitive, tunable, frequency-selective

voltmeter and a variable-frequency CW signal generator as
shown in figure 4.6.1. The voltmeter measures the signal
level of internal sources at the selected receiver
terminals . The signal generator is used to calibrate the
voltmeter. Conducted emission, in dBm ^ is computed from
the voltmeter reading and the impedance level at the
terminals
Measurem.ent uncertainties as small as 0.3 dB are

possible under best conditions, and range from 0.5 dB to
1.5 dB under typical conditions. This method uses commonly
available test equipment, but requires some specialized
accessories
1. Tunable, frequency-selective voltmeter
2. Variable frequency CW generator
3. Insertion network
4. Line impedance network
4.6.1.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the input port of the SELECTIVE VOLTMETER to

the selected terminals of the receiver through an INSERTION
NETWORK or LINE IMPEDANCE NETWORK as shown in figure 4.6.1.
The networks should provide proper terminations for both the
selective voltmeter and the receiver.
289
1 t 1 i
1 i
o UJ
3:
1—
LU
LU
0
1— ^
o
•H
s:
1±±
1— q: CO
H-
0
1
q: 01
UJ LU3
00 Z 1—
1— LU1
1— _l
II II
<a
+i
2: z: o
1— 1—
o
_l o
1— t— 0 u
ZD ZD :3 q;
0 0 0 1— 01
o
o
»w
Ll_ LU :3
Q 0 —I h-
2:
—
1
LO
0 •< <c §
_l LU I
1— +j
ZD 00 LU
0 w
Ll.
4J
LU —
t
(fl
>
—
I
0)
LU 01
<_) LU
LU 3
a: 0
•H
290
.
2. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXIV.
3. Set the voltmeter for maximum sensitivity.
4. Tune the voltmeter until it indicates a response to a

signal coming from the measurement terminals.
5. Adjust voltmeter sensitivity to indicate the level

of the response.
Disconnect the voltmeter from the insertion or line

6.
impedance netvrork and connect it to the SIGNAL GENERATOR.
7. Tune the generator to the frequency that produced the

voltmeter response. Record this frequency, f^ , in kilohertz
or megahertz.
Adjust the output level of the generator to produce

8.
the same response as that produced by the signal from the
receiver
9. Determine the available povrer, P (f ) , in dBm, from

g r
the generator in Step 7, above, by determining the generator
open circuit voltage, E^, and generator source impedance,
Z (see Section 4.10.).
s
10. Calculate the available oovrer, P (f ) , in dBm,

'
from the
r r
receiver by ADDING the loss, L, in dB , of the insertion or line
impedance network at frequency f^. P_^(f^)is the conducted
emission, in dBm, of the receiver at frequency f^.
291
TABLE XXXIV
Conducted Emission
'
Control Setting
1. Band Switch 1 . As desired
2. Frequency Tuning 2. . As desired
3. Antenna Trimmer Peak
4. RF Gain A
4 . Maximum
c
7\ c
6 . AF Gain
(-
D . t\S QcbXrcU
/~i tê^
T
7. Line Gain 7 . As desired

o As desired
8. Detector Mode o .
9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9 . As desired i normally uln;
10 . BFO Frequency 10 . As desired
11. IF Bandwidth 11 . Optional
12. AF Bandwidth 12 . Optional
292
.
11. Repeat Steps 3 through 10 at other frequencies that

produce a voltmeter response. Be sure to include fundamental
and harmonic frequencies of known sources with the receiver.
1. Record receiver control settings and operational

information
2. Record frequencies, f^ , of conducted emissions.
3. Record voltmeter readings of conducted emissions.
4. Record the generator

^
power, P (f ) , in dBm, available
g r
at frequency f^
5. Record the loss, in dB , at frequency f_^, of the

insertion or line impedance network.
6. Record the conducted emission power, Pj-(f^) t in

dBm, for each frequency, f^.

g g
2. Uncertainty, AL , in the measured loss, L, of the

insertion or line impedance network
The total relative uncertainty, AP^ (dB) , in decibels,

in the conducted emission, P^, expressed in dBm, is given
AP (dB) = 10
r
293
Relative uncertainty AP^/P^ is given by the equation
AP AE AZ
_g _ o g + s
P E z
g g s
where AE is the uncertainty in the measured value of

g
generator voltage, E^, and AZ^ is the uncertainty in the
measured value of source impedance, Z^.
Uncertainty AE is obtained from the manufacturer's

g
specifications on the selective voltmeter; AZ is obtained
s
from the specifications on the impedance meter used to
measure Z ; AL is obtained from the specifications on the
s
equipment (power meter, voltmeter, etc.) used to measure
insertion loss, L.
294
4.6.2. RADIATED EMISSION
4.6.2.1. DEFINITION
Radiated emission is the field strength, in volts per

meter, produced by radiation from the receiver, due to signal
sources within the receiver, at a specified point external to
the receiver.
Note: Because the antenna used with the receiver

may not be uniquely specified, radiated
emission as considered in this Section will
not include radiation via the receiver's
antenna terminals.
4.6.2.2. PURPOSE

field strength of electromagnetic energy radiated from all
parts of the receiver except the antenna terminals. Radiation
may come from internal sources via the power, audio, or
interconnecting cables, and/or from leakage paths in the
receiver's enclosure. Receiver radiation is a measure of the
receiver's interference potential to other electronic or
communications equipment.
Note: The method given below is only indicative

of the basic principle of measurement. It
is not given as a recommended method that
will give accurate results. See the discussion
given under Section 4.6.
295
.
4.6.2.3. METHOD
The method uses a field intensity meter (FIM) as shown

in figure 4.6.2. The FIM measures the field intensity at a
point in space that has a specified relationship to the
receiver; this relationship depends upon the measurement
frequency, and is given in the procedure below.
Measurement uncertainties are seldom less than 10 0% and

uses commonly available test equipment of moderate
sophistication
1. Field intensity meter
2. Shielded termination for receiver's antenna port
3. Power line filter
4.6.2.5. PROCEDURE, ELECTRIC FIELD, 14 KHZ TO

100 MHZ
1. Place the receiver on a ground plane that meets the

specifications of MIL-STD-462, paragraph 4.2.1.2.
2 Connect the receiver through the POWER LINE FILTER to

.
the source of primary power. Bond the filter to the ground

plane at a point at least 2 meters from the receiver.
3. Attach the SHIELDED TERMINATION to the receiver's

antenna port.
4. Adjust the electrical settings of the receiver for the

desired operating conditions.
296
o
•H
W
W
•H
g
H
T(
0)
+J
t«
•H
to
mo
+>
0)
w
+>
m
Eh
CM
&4
297
.
5. Tune the FIM to the measurement frequency, or place

the FIM in the swept- frequency mode.
6. Scan the receiver with the FIM probe (antenna) to

locate the sites of maximum radiation, Orient the FIM probe
as required for maximum pick-up.
7. When radiation is detected, position the FIM probe

1 meter from the nearest point to the receiver, and adjust
the orientation of the probe and the frequency of the FIM
for maximum FIM response.
8. Measure the field intensity with the FIM. This is

the receiver radiation, in volts per meter, at the measurement
frequency for the selected receiver operating conditions.
9. Repeat Steps 4 through 8, above, until the desired

range of frequencies and receiver operating conditions are
covered.
1. Record receiver control settings and operating

conditions
2. Record frequency of radiated emissions.
3. Record field intensity of radiated emissions.

and are difficult to predict for the general case. See
discussion given under Section 4.6.
298
.
4.7. ii::z Dzu^Y
4.7.1. DEFINITION
Time delay is the tine interval between the manifestation

of a signal at one point and the manifestation or detection of
-he saiTie signal at another point. (IEEE Std 100-1972)
4.7.2. PUEPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to mêasure the

time delay of signals passing through s\irveillance receivers.
Time delay is important when combining two or more receivers
in multiple-diversity receiving systems , or in position-plotting
systems
4.7.3. METHOD
This method uses a modulated signal generator, a matched

pair of detectors, and a cathode-ray oscilloscope as shovm in
figure 4.7. The generator supplies a modulated signal of known
modulation frequency "^c che receiver. The matched detectors
supply demodulated signals zo -he two vertical input channels
of rhe oscilloscope, which operates in a dual-channel mode.
The oscilloscope displays zhe time displacement betvreen the two
demodulated signals, and -ime delay is measured graphically from
this display.
This method is mcsz useful vrhen the zime delay is longer

than twice zhe reciprocal bandwidth cr, if -chey are approximately
equal, time delay musz be approximately proportional to reciprocal
bandwidth. Otheir^vise , accuracy may suffer.
299
1 1 11
I 11
O CO
=)=
(_)
CO
o
_l 1— 1—
_1 cm
1 — LU
o > >
00
o
i
a:
o
0)
Q
i
a:. u- I— (D
UJ 1—1 rD 6
>
—
1
O •A
UJ
(_3
UJ O
§
>- r
0 Cd
q: UJ UJ
UJ 0 1—
-p
_I H- cr UJ
cn ct UJ
ct ID h-
0
—
i.^
1
-H
0 i«i
t— 0
1—
h- 0
<3
0
1—
UJ
1
J —1
0 I—
t—
UJ
OO
—
1
—1 1—
0
C9 UJ
CO UJ
CD
300
best conditions, and range from 3% to 10% under typical conditions.
This method uses commonly available test equipment of moderate
sophistication.
1. Signal generator capable of external amplitude or

frequency modulation
2. Audio signal generator
3. Frequency meter
5. Variable attenuator
6 . Two matched envelope detectors
7. Two matched frequency - modulation detectors
8. Cathode-ray oscilloscope with dual-channel mode

of operation
9 . Oscilloscope camera
4.7.5. PROCEDURE

port of the SIGNAL GENERATOR through the VARIABLE ATTENUATOR.
2. Connect DETECTOR No. 1 to the junction of the signal

generator and the variable attenuator.
301
. .
3. Connect DETECTOR No. 2 to the output of the last I.E.

amplifier stage of the receiver. If detector No. 1 matches the
detector built into the receiver, the receiver's detector may
be used in place of detector No. 2.
4. Connect each detector output to a vertical input port

of the dual channel OSCILLOSCOPE.
5. Connect the output port of the AUDIO GENERATOR to the

EXTERNAL MODULATION input port of the signal generator.
6. Connect the FREQUENCY METER through an ISOLATION NETWORK

to the junction of the audio generator and the signal generator.
7. Set the receiver controls as given in Table XXXV.
8. Set oscilloscope controls as given in Table XXXVI.
9 . Tune the signal generator and the receiver to the

10. Adjust the oscilloscope vertical gains to maximum,

and approximately equal
11a. If the measurement is on an AM receiver, adjust the

amplitude modulation of the signal generator to 30% at a very
low frequency, e.g., 25 hertz.
OR
lib. If the measurement is on an FM receiver, adjust the

frequency modulation of the signal generator to ±60% of rated
system deviation at a very low frequency, e.g., 25 hertz.
302
TABLE XXXV
Time Delay
Control Setting
1 . Band Switch 1 . As desired

3 . Antenna Trimmer 3. Peak
4 . RF Gain 4 . Moderate
5. IF Gain 5 . Moderate
6 . AF Gain 6 . Optional
8. Detector Mode 8. AM or FM
9. Beat Frequency Oscillator 9 . Off
10 . BFO Frequency 10. N.A.
13 . Noise Limiter 13. Off
14 . Squelch Level 14. Off
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . Optional
303
TABLE XXXVI
Oscilloscope Control Settings
Control Setting
1 . Mode 1. Chopped
2. Channel 1 Gain 2. As required
3 . Channel 2 Gain 3. As required
4 . Sweep speed 4. As required
5. Trigger Mode 5. Internal, Ch
6 . Trigger Phase 6. Zero
304
Adjust the signal generator output to maximum, e.g.,
12.
approximately 100,000 to 1,000,000 microvolts.
Adjust oscilloscope controls to obtain a stable trace

13.
from detector No. 1. Display from 5 to 15 cycles of the
sinusoid pattern.
14. Adjust the variable attenuator to produce approximately

the same output from detector No. 2 as from detector No. 1.
15. Note the time relationship between the traces of the

output signals from detectors No. 1 and No. 2. There is usually
a small time displacement between the two traces.
16 . Increase the frequency of the audio generator. The

trace from detector No. 2 should move relative to that of
detector No. 1.
17. Determine if the frequency can be increased sufficiently

to cause the two traces to be in exact phase alignment, so they
can be superimposed, without having the signal from detector
No. 2 decrease in amplitude by more than 3 dB. This is a function
of r-eceiver CW bandwidth. If this is possible, adjust the audio
generator to a frequency, f^, where the two traces are exactly
in phase on the screen.
18. Measure frequency f with the frequency meter.

a
19. Calculate t by the equation
1
T =
f
a
T is the time delay of the receiver at frequency f .
305
20. Confirm the value of t in the following way:
Increase the generator to the frequency fj^ that causes the
two traces to again be exactly in phase, if possible. Under
this condition,
1
T =
For T = 1/f as in Step 18, above, then f, will equal 2f . In

general.
= m m + 1
T '
fx fa f2 - fl
where m is an integer.
If the receiver bandwidth prevents obtaining a trace from

detector No. 2 with modulation frequency f^, then x cannot be
checked in this way.
21. If the receiver bandwidth prevents obtaining a trace

)m detector No.
from 2 with modulation
m^ frequency f as in Step 17,
a
above, proceed as follows:
a. Adjust the audio generator to the frequency, f^, at which

the output from detector No. 2. is approximately 3 dB below that
of detector No. 1. -
'
b. Measure the time interval. At, between a zero crossing

point on the output of detector No. 1 and a same zero crossing
point of the same slope on the output of detector No. 2. Expand
the horizontal scale to facilitate this measurement. Photograph
the display, if desired.
306
. . ,
c Determine time delay, t, by the equation
T = At
Record the measurement frequency, f^, in kilohertz or

1.
megahertz
2. Record the variable attenuator setting. A, in decibels.
3. Record the modulation/demodulation mode, AM or FM.
4. Record the oscilloscope adjustments; particularly note

the horizontal sweep speed.
5. Record the audio generator frequencies, f , f , or f ,

a b c
in hertz.
6. Record the measured value of At, in milliseconds.
7. Record the calculated value of time delay, t, in

microseconds or milliseconds.
1. Uncertainties Af Af. and Af in the measured values

a' c'
of f and f
c
2. Uncertainty, A (At), in the measured value of At.
307
.
3 . Uncertainty, A (At ) , in the superposition of the two

traces in Step 17, above.
When using Steps 17, 18, and 19 to measure x, the total

relative uncertainty, At(%), expressed in percent, in t is ,
given by the equation
At (%) =1 + X 100 ,
where T is the time, in seconds, for the trace to sweep across

the screen
When using Step 20 to measure x, Ax(%) is given by the

equation
Af Af A (At
AX (%)
/
=(-f^- ^^jx ) \
•
a^ b '
When using Step 21 to measure x, Ax(%) is given by the

equation
-
4t (%) . X 100 .
Uncertainties Af , Af , and Af are obtained from the

a a c
manufacturer's specifications on the frequency meter.
Uncertainties A (At) and A (At are obtained from the )
a
manufacturer's specifications on the horizontal sweep
circuits of the oscilloscope.
308
.
4.8. FREQUENCY STABILITY
The frequency stability of a receiver may be considered in

two different ways. First, the various oscillators within the
receiver may change frequency because of electrical or physical
changes to which they respond. Second, the various circuits
that provide frequency selectivity within the receiver may
change their response characteristics for the same reasons.
Both of these changes can cause degradation in receiver
performance
Only oscillator stability is discussed in this section.

Methods for measuring the stability of frequency sensitive
transducers generally are the same as for measuring
selectivity (cf.).
The method given in this section applies to frequency

fluctuations that occur at a rate that is slower than approxi-
mately one hertz per second; there is no limit in principle to
the slowness of fluctuation for which this method applies. The
method may lose utility for fluctuations faster than one hertz
per second because of instrument limitations. However, the
method is applicable to most stability problems encountered
with surveillance receivers, and no attempt is made here to
divide these problems into the two poorly defined categories
of short-term stability and long-term stability.
4.8.1. DEFINITION
The frequency stability of a receiver is the change in

oscillator frequency per unit change in a frequency-perturbing
parameter. Examples of such parameters include (1) time,
(2) temperature, (3) voltage, (4) atmospheric pressure, and
(5) humidity.
309
4.8.2. PURPOSE

frequency stability of the oscillators contained within
surveillance receivers. Examples of such oscillators are
(1) tunable oscillators used for frequency conversion,
commonly called local oscillators, (2) beat frequency

oscillators used to render keyed CW signals audible, and
(3) oscillators used for synchronous detection of suppressed
carrier signals. The frequency stability of such oscillators
is a measure of the receiver's ability to receive stable
signals without drift in spite of changes in power supply
and ambient conditions.
4.8.3. METHOD
The method uses a stable CW generator, a precision

electronic counter, and a digital printer as shown in
figure 4.8. The generator delivers a signal at a known
frequency to the receiver. The counter measures the
frequency from the IF section for receivers operating in
the AM and FM modes, and from the AF section for CW and
SSB modes . The printer provides a hard copy record of the
counter output. < .
I.F. output signal frequency is measured under controlled

conditions where the frequency-perturbing parameter is
changed in a known way. Frequency stability is obtained from
a graphical plot of I.F. output frequency versus this
parameter.
Measurement uncertainties as small as 0.2 Hz are possible

under best conditions, and range from 0.2 Hz to 1 Hz under
typical conditions. The method requires sophisticated but
310
1 ( 1
cc
LU
1—
t —
1—
O +1
•H
H
•H
,Q
(d
-P
o
>-

o -p
CO
—
1
Q)
LU (—
00
<c
C>
en
P4
_i 1—
o
<: <c
cc
LU
1—1 z:
CO LU
t!3
311
. : ,
1. Stable CW signal generator
2. Electronic counter
3. Digital printer
4. Equipment as required to produce controlled changes

in operating conditions, such as (1) variable autotransf ormer
(2) environmental chamber.
4.8.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the CW SIGNAL GENERATOR to the input port

of the receiver.
2. Connect the DIGITAL COUNTER to the output of the IF

amplifier, if the measurement is not to include the BFO
stability. Otherwise, connect the counter to the output
terminals of the audio amplifier.
3. Connect the DIGITAL PRINTER to the counter per

manufacturer's instructions.
4. Arrange the receiver as required for the desired test.

For example
a. If the test is to measure frequency as a function of

line voltage, connect the receiver line cable to a regulated,
adjustable, and metered supply of the proper voltage and
frequency
b. If the test is to measure frequency as a function of

environmental conditions, install the receiver in a suitable
environmental chamber that provides the required control and
metering of the environmental parameter.
312
. .
c. If the test is to measure frequency as a function of

time for special operating conditions, such as those indicated
in a and b, above, provide a clock to monitor this parameter.
For "average" operating conditions, special auxiliary
equipment may not be required.
5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXVII.

7. Adjust the output level of the generator to produce

a clean output signal from the IF or audio sections.
8. Measure the generator frequency, f^ , with the counter.
9. Measure the IF output signal frequency, fj^^/ with the

counter
10. Measure the audio output signal frequency, f ^, with

the counter (CW and^SB modes only) .
11. Repeat Steps 8 through 10, above, according to the

desired information. That is, repeat the measurements as often
as desired to obtain the stability as a function of time with
the desired density of measurement points; repeat as required
by changes in test conditions per Step 4, above.
12. Plot, on rectilinear graph paper, the measured frequency

as a function of the frequency-perturbing parameter (voltage,
temperature, time, etc.).
13. Determine the slope of the curve plotted in Step 12,

above, at any point of interest. The slope is the FREQUENCY
STABILITY of the oscillator at that particular operating
point.
313
TABLE XXXVII
Frequency Stability
Settings
Control Setting

'.'
4 . RF Gain ^ 4. As required
5. IF Gain 5. As required

8. Detector Mode 8. As desired
9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9 . As desired
10 . BFO Frequency 10 . As desired
11. IF Bandwidth 11. Optional
12. AF Bandwidth 12. Optional
14 . Squelch Level ,
.. 14. OFF
314
. :

or megahertz.
2. Record the IF output signal frequency, ^ j_f'

3. Record the audio output signal frequency, f r: , in

a£
hertz or kilohertz.
4. Record the value of the frequency-perturbing parameter,

and correlate it with the measured IF or audio signal frequency.

following
1. Uncertainty, Af , in the measured value of each

frequency, f
2. Uncertainty, '^^g' frequency of the stable CW

generator, due to drift
3. Uncertainty in the value of the frequency-perturbing

parameter selected for the test
The total relative uncertainty, Af^(%) , in percent, in

the measured value of frequency, f, is given by the equation
Uncertainties Af and Af are obtained from the manufacturer's

g
specifications on the signal generator and on the electronic
counter
315
4.9. FREQUENCY READOUT ERROR
4.9.1. DEFINITION
Frequency readout error is the frequency difference, in hertz

or kilohertz, between the receiver's indicated reception frequency
and the frequency to which the receiver is tuned.
4.9.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to measure

the frequency readout error of surveillance receivers. Readout
error affects the ease with which the receiver can be tuned to
receive a signal of a given carrier frequency.
4.9.3. METHOD
The method uses a stable CW generator and a precision

electronic counter as shown in figure 4.9. The generator
delivers a signal at a known frequency to the receiver.
The counter measures the frequency of the I.F. signal. The
receiver is tuned until the I.F. signal is at the specified
frequency. The difference between the receiver's indicated
frequency and the generator frequency is the readout error.
The measurement uncertainty is determined primarily by the
readout resolution of the receiver's frequency display. The
method uses sophisticated but commonly available test
equipment.
1. Stable CW signal generator
2. Electronic counter
316
O
>-)
>^
W
-P
O
tJ
ftf
0)
Pi
>1
o
C3
(U
S-l
mo
:3
I
+>
<u
w
-p
i CO
<u
o
—1 1—
CP
•H
317
.
4.9.5. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the CW SIGNAL GENERATOR to the input port

of the receiver.
2. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXVIII.
3. Tune the signal generator to the measurement, f^
4. Adjust the output level of the generator to produce

a clean output signal from the I.F. section of the receiver.
5. Measure the generator frequency, f^, with the COUNTER.
6. Connect the counter to the output of the I.F. amplifier

section.
7. Tune the receiver near f^, and adjust the tuning to

produce an I.F. signal with a frequency equal to the
manufacturer's specified intermediate frequency, fj_f
8. Read the indicated reception frequency, f^, on the

receiver's frequency readout display.
9. Calculate the frequency difference, Af^, in hertz or

kilohertz, between f^ and f^ by the equation
Af = f - f
r r o
318
. 1 .
TABLE XXXVIII
Frequency Readout Error
Con tro S ett ing
1 Band Switch 1 As desired

3 . Antenna Triitimer 3 . Peak
4 . RF Ga in 4 . As required
5 . IF Gain 5 . As required
6 . AF Gain 6 . As desired
7 7 I LV^^llCtJ-
8. Detector Mode 8 . AM, FM, as desired

9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9. Off
10, BFO Frequency 10. N.A.
11. IF Bandwidth 11 Optional
13. Noise Limiter 13. Off
14 . Squelch Level 14. Off
16 . Meter Switch 16. Optional
319
..
Af^ is the frequency readout error of the receiver at the

indicated reception frequency, f^. If Af^ is positive, f^ is
qreater
^ than f if Af is neqative, f
; is less than f .
o r r o

or megahertz
2. Record the intermediate frequency, fj_£/ in kilohertz

or megahertz
3. Record the indicated reception frequency, f^, in

4. Record the frequency readout error, Af^, in hertz

or kilohertz
The principal source of measurement error is normally the

uncertainty in the receiver's frequency display, which is
determined by its readout resolution. In this case, the total
measurement uncertainty, A(Af^), in hertz, in the measured
readout error, Af is the receiver readout resolution. This
,
r
is obtained from the manufacturer's specifications, or by
inspection of the readout indicator.
320
.
4.10. IMPEDANCE
The requirements for impedance measurement in surveillance

receivers usually pertain to antenna input impedance and IF
and/or AF output impedance. Because these impedances involve
active components measurement methods are required that do
,
not significantly alter the impedance whose value is to be

measured.
4.10.1. DEFINITIONS
a. Input impedance is the impedance presented by the

receiver to the signal source.
b. Output impedance is the impedance presented by the

receiver to a termination.
c. Impedance is the ratio, at a given frequency, of

(a) the sinusoidal voltage across a pair of terminals to
(b) the corresponding sinusoidal current, at the same
frequency, passing into and out of the pair of terminals.
4.10.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of these measurement methods is to measure the

input and output impedances at the accessible ports of
receivers. These impedances determine in large part the
ability of a receiver to deliver output signals of acceptable
quality at adequate power levels
Impedance is a function of frequency. Input impedances

are normally measured at frequencies in the range to which
the receiver is tuned. Output impedances are measured at audio
frequencies, and at intermediate frequencies (IF's) when the
receiver is provided with a suitable I.F. output network and
321
.
connector. Further, the input and output impedances of special

circuits, such as local oscillator inputs or outputs can be
measured by these methods.

best conditions, and range from 5% to 20% under typical
conditions. The method requires sophisticated but commonly
4 . 10 . 3 . METHOD I - VECTOR IMPEDANCE METER
The method uses a variable frequency vector impedance meter

as shown in figure 4.10.1. The impedance meter contains its own
signal source, detector networks, and output display. Impedance
is read directly from the meter display.
This method is suitable for measuring both input and output

impedances. It is particularly suited for impedance measurement
when the network under test can tolerate only a very small test
signal because of low-level active devices.
1. Vector impedance meter
4.10.3.2. PROCEDURE
Connect the VECTOR IMPEDANCE METER probe to the

1.
terminals of the receiver at which the measurement is to be
made
2. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXIX.
3. Tune the vector impedance meter to the measurement

frequency, f .
322
V VV
6 <5 6
U- LU ID O
—
1 I
OO
0)
< O
O I—
.So <
0
M
O
U-l
Cu
-P
<u
CO
1 4J
CO
(1)
o
oc ^ ct:
O <t UJ
I— Q h-
O UJ UJ
UJ Cl_ ^
CP
•H
Cm
323
.
TABLE XXXIX
Impedance, Methods I and II
Control Setting
3 Antenna Trimmer . 3. As desired
4. RF Gain 4 . As desired
5. IF Gain 5. As desired
6. AF Gain 6 . As desired
7. Line Gain 7. As desired
8. Detector Mode 8 . Optional

1 n
±u . rsr u r requency 1 n
xu . N.A
324
. . :
4. Read the impedance indicated by the meter. If the

meter indication is in terms of magnitude, Z and phase I
,
angle, 0, convert to real, R, and reactive, X, parts by

the following equations
Z = R + jX
where
R = I
Z I cos 0
X = I
Z I sin 0
5. Record the values of R and X as the terminal impedance

at frequency f ^

or megahertz
2. Identify the terminals at which the measurement is made.
3. Record the measured values of |z| and 0.
4. Record the calculated values of R and X.
4 . 10 . 3 . 4 . MEASUREMENT ERRORS
The measurement uncertainty is given by the manufacturer's

specifications on the impedance meter.
325
4.10.4. METHOD II - IMPEDANCE BRIDGE
The method uses a variable frequency signal generator, an

impedance bridge, and a signal detector as shown in figure
4.10.2. The generator provides current for the bridge circuit,
and the detector indicates the null condition. The bridge is
adjusted for a null at the measurement frequency, and impedance
is read from the dial settings on the bridge.
This method is suitable for measuring both input and output

impedances, but for some receivers it must be used with care
when measuring input impedance. The required signal level
across the measuring terminals of the bridge is usually greater
than for Method I, above, which can produce erroneous results
because of nonlinear network components.

conditions. The method uses moderately sophisticated but
2. Impedance bridge
3. Null detector
4.10.4.2. PROCEDURE
1. Connect the SIGNAL GENERATOR, IMPEDANCE BRIDGE, and

NULL DETECTOR as shown in figure 4.10.2. Connect the bridge
measuring terminals to the terminals of the receiver at which
the measurement is to be made. For most situations, use a
coaxial cable for this connection.
326
I
VV
I6 o
ea; z
HH
Q
to
o
Ll_
<
O
o < +»
LU
<
O
u
i o
M-l
<_> o 0)
Q Q
LU HH p
a. q:: m
^ CQ <D
EH
—I I—
o H
CU LU
I—
00 UJ
327
. .
2. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXVIX, p. 324.
3. Tune the generator to the measurement frequency, f^.
4. Adjust the generator output level to near maximum

(e.g., between 0.1 and 1.0 volt).
5. Adjust the null detector sensitivity to indicate

bridge output. If the null detector is tunable, tune it to
6. Adjust the bridge for an initial balance, following

the manufacturer's instructions.
7. Measure the receiver impedance desired, following the

manufacturer's instructions.
8. Record the indicated readings of R and X from the

bridge dials
9. Apply frequency corrections to the dial readings,

if necessary.
10 . Correct the measurement results for the effects of the

cable connecting the bridge to the receiver terminals , following
the manufacturer's instructions. This usually entails measuring
the parameters of the cable, and applying these results by
means of formulae or charts supplied by the manufacturer.
11. Record the corrected values of R and X as the terminal

impedance at frequency f^
12. Reduce the generator output level by 10 dB, and repeat

Steps 6 through 11. If the measurement results differ from the
original, reduce the generator output further until the results
do not change or until they are degraded by noise. The variation
328
.
of R and/or X with bridge drive level is an indication of

excessive signal at the measurement terminals. The values
obtained at the lowest drive level are normally the most
nearly correct. If a stable measurement result cannot be
obtained because of this cause, use Method I, above.
Record the measurement frequency, f^, in kilohertz

1.
or megahertz.
2. Identify the terminals at which the measurement is

made
4 . 10 . 4 . 4 . MEASUREMENT ERRORS
The measurement uncertainty is given by the manufacturer's

specifications on the impedance meter.
329
4. 11. STANDING WAVE RATIO
The requirements for VSWR measurements on surveillance

receivers usually pertain to the antenna input and IF output
ports. Because the ports connect to active circuits within
the receiver, measurement methods are required that do not
significantly alter the VSWR whose value is to be measured.
4.11.1. DEFINITION
a.Standing wave ratio is the ratio of the amplitude of

a standing wave at an antinode to the amplitude at a node.
(IEEE STD 100-1972)
. b. The voltage standing wave ratio, VSWR, at a specified

port of receiver is the ratio of (a) the absolute value of
a
the port's reflection coefficient, |r|, plus unity (1), to
(b) unity minus the absolute value of the port's reflection
coefficient.
1 + I
r I
VSWR =
1 - r
c. The reflection coefficient, F, at a port is given by

the equation
Z - Z
P = _E I '
z + z
p ^
where Z^ = complex impedance looking into the port,
Z^ = reference impedance.
Note: From the above definitions, VSWR can be expressed

by the normalized relationship.
Z
VSWR = ^ r
.
When Zp < Z^, the VSWR at the port is usually expressed by

the relationship
Z
VSWR = ^ .
330
4.11.2. PURPOSE

VSWR at the accessible ports of surveillance receivers. VSWR
is a measure of the receiver's ability to transfer power to and
from the circuits connected to these ports.
4.11.3. METHOD
The method uses a variable frequency vector impedance meter

as shown in figure 4.11. The impedance meter contains its own
signal source, detector networks, and output display. VSWR is
obtained by first measuring the impedance at the port, and
then computing VSWR by means of a Z-9 chart.
I-leasurement uncertainties as small as 6% are possible under

typical conditions The method uses sophisticated but commonly
.
1. Vector impedance meter
2. Z-3 chart paper (or Sm.ith chart paper)
4.11.5. PROCEDURE
Connect the VECTOR IMPEDANCE METER probe to the termdnals

1.
of the receiver at which the measurement is to be made.
2. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXX.
3. Tune the vector impedance meter to the measurement

frequency, f^.
331
VV
o
-rH
-P
0)
>
•H
(d
-p
cn
+J
m
1 -p
cn
(U
CE
a:
O =1 UJ
1— Q t—
O UJ UJ
UJ O-
>
332
. ,
.
TABLE XXXX
Standing Wave Ratio
Setting
1
-L. • 1 As desired
2 2 As desired
p
3 7\ -p +-
L«
J.
;3
-p C-t
1111 X X. -L TTimPT
"PtI 1 LI J_ L L 3 As desired
4 RF
XVL C-iPi \ n
VJd-l-ll 4 . As desired
•J • J- J- wCl-l-ll As desired
o •
AT? 1 n a
\j • As desired
7 ±j-Lilc: odXll 7 As des ired

o
o •
O o "H o "f* 1^ Q
O • Optional
q o d
Ro;^"!"
tr: L. r "V'îirT 1 o r^\7
T? i.ti'^Llt-iloy 1 "I
I
1o y~
Oq/î— —Ld L-wi.
woOJ -j- q OFF
or w
TI) XT' XT'
r v~ lO
X r~T
fcit^ i T
Lit-
>^
1 1 oy
/^\7 X 0
1 w • N .A
11. IF Bandwidth 11. As des ired
15. AGC/:4GC :4ode Switch 15. As desired
333
4. Read the impedance indicated by the meter.
5. Plot \z\ and G on Z-0 CHART PAPER. If the impedance

meter gives the real part, R, and imaginary part, X, of Z,
normalize these values and plot on a Smith chart.
6. Determine the VSWR circle on the Z-0 chart (or Smith

chart) by constructing a circle whose center is at the origin
of the chart and which passes through the point |z| , 0 (or R
and X, normalized) .
7. With Z-0 paper, determine the value of VSWR by locating

the point of intersection between the Z/Z - axis and the circle.
Read the value for which Z/Z^ > 1. (On the Smith chart, the VSWR
is the intersection of the circle and the real axis.) This is
the VSWR at the port. Express VSVJR as a ratio of this number
to unity (e.g., 1.5:1 or 3:1, etc.).

or megahertz.
2. Identify the terminals at which the measurement is made.
3. Record the measured values of |z| and 0.
5. Record the value of VSWR, determined from Z-0 chart.
334
:

following
1. Uncertainty, A|z|, in the measured value of |z|
2. Uncertainty, AG, in the measured value of 0
3. Uncertainty, A (VSWR) , in the reading resolution of

the points on the Z-0 chart
The total relative uncertainty, VSWR (%), in percent,

A
in the VSWR of the specified receiver port, is given by the

equation
AVSWR (%) = X lOo) . . loo) . . lOo) .
Uncertainties A|z| and AG are obtained from the manufacturer's

specifications on the impedance meter. Uncertainty A (VSWR) is
estimated from the readability of the plot on the Z-G chart.
335
4.12. DETECTORS
Procedures for testing the characteristics of various types

of detectors separately from the receiver as a system are not
given in this handbook because they have limited value in the
evaluation of receiver performance. Detector performance is an
integral part of overall receiver performance. Thus, the
procedures given in Sections 4.1 through 4.11 either do, or can,
include the effects of the selected detector mode on the
measured receiver parameter.
The procedures cited above are given explicitly only for

AM and/or FM detector modes. A portion of those procedures also
applies to testing done in the CW and SSB detector modes.
Specifically, these include the following:
Section 4 .1. 1. Gain-limited Sensitivity

Section 4 . 1. 2. 6 dB SN/N Sensitivity
Section 4 . 1. 3. 12 dB SINAD Sensitivity
Section 4 .3. 1. Power Gain
Section 4 .3. 2. Dynamic Range
Section 4 .3. 3. Automatic Gain Control
Section 4 .4. 8. Cross Modulation
Section 4 .4. 7. Desensi tization
To test in the CW or SSB modes, the procedure for the AM mode

is followed with the exception of the choice of detector and
BFO settings, which are selected as required by the test.
336
. .
4.13. AUDIO SECTION
Although the audio amplifier portion of a receiver is only

one of several sections through which a signal must pass, its
characteristics are normally measured separately from other
sections. The characteristics of primary interest are gain,
frequency response, power output, linearity, distortion, hum,
and noise. Methods for measuring these parameters are discussed
separately in this section. Also included in this section are
measurement methods for noise limiter and squelch circuits.
4.13.1. AUDIO GAIN
Audio gain is the ratio , m decibels, of (a) the power that

an audio amplifier delivers to a specified load under specified
operating conditions to (b) the available power of a specified
source
4.13.1.2. PURPOSE

gain of the audio section of surveillance rece ivers . This
parameter is a measure of the receiver's abili ty to amplify a
demodulated signal into a usable output signal of acceptable
quality
4.13.1.3. METHOD
The method uses an audio signal generator and a distortion

analyzer as shown in figure 4.13.1. The signal generator supplies
a known input voltage at the measurement frequency, f ^ to the ,
audio section of the receiver. The distortion analyzer measures

the level and distortion percentage of the audio output power.
337
I
1.
o
I— ai
I— O
I O
I—I
Q£
Lul
<: I- I— tvl C
cc >- H
t—
1 1
— O _l (15
O
2: 00
a: uj
I—
1/5
<
S O
o •H
O
m
a
^3
I
+J
LUca: ZD Q)
> o o CO
OS +J
C_) w
O
U- cC
<u
I
i cC O0 Eh
o
o I— -H
Cm
o a:
338
.
The generator's available output power is adjusted to a

level that produces either rated audio output power or an audio
output power that contains 10% distortion. The ratio of receiver
output power to generator available power in decibels, is the
audio gain of the receiver at this distortion level.

2 dB under typical conditions. The method uses commonly
3. Distortion analyzer
4.13.1.5. PROCEDURE
Connect the output port of the SIGNAL GENERATOR through

1.
a cable to the receiver's AF gain control. Break the connection
between this gain control and the circuit preceding the control.

output port of the receiver. Connect the audio DISTORTION

rated output power, P^
4. Tune the signal generator to the measurement frequency,

f . This is normally
^ 1000 Hz.
o
339
.
5. Adjust the AF gain control to maximum gain setting.
Adjust the output level of the signal generator to

6.
produce either rated audio output power or 10% distortion in the

termination resistor as measured with the distortion analyzer.
7. Measure the total audio output power, P (i.e. signal ,
plus noise plus distortion) in the termination resistor, ,
with the distortion analyzer. Use the equation
2
E
= °
P
where is the voltage reading of the analyzer.
8. Determine the available power, P

Use the equation
E
"a
2
, from the generator.
= 1
P '
a 4 R
g
where is the open circuit voltage and R^ is the output

impedance of the generator.
9. Calculate the gain, G, in decibels, by the equation
P
G(dB) = 10 log .
G(dB) is the audio gain of the receiver, at the measurement

frequency, f^ , for rated audio output power or 10% distortion in
the termination resistor as measured with the distortion analyzer.
1. Record the measurement frequency, f^ , in hertz or kilo-

hertz .
2. Record the total audio output power, P^, in milliwatts

or watts
340
: . .
3. Record the generator available power, P , in

a
mi lliwatts
4. Record the audio gain, G, in decibels.

following

o o

-'
a a
The total relative uncertainty, AG(dB), in decibels, in

the gain, G, is given approximately, for small uncertainties,
by the equation
AG (dB) = 10
Uncertainties AP and AP are obtained from the manufacturer's

o a
specifications on the distortion analyzer and signal generator,
respectively
341
4.13.2. AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Audio frequency response is the gain characteristic as a

function of frequency of the audio section of the receiver.
4.13.2.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of these measurement methods is to measure

the audio frequency response of surveillance receivers. This
characteristic is a measure of the spectrum of audio frequen-
cies which the receiver will amplify with significant gain.
Four methods are discussed. The first three use audio

frequency signals, and deal with the audio section alone.
The fourth method uses a modulated RF signal, and therefore
includes the selectivity effect of the receiver pre-detection
stages. The third method uses a swept-f requency technique,
whereas the remaining methods use the point-by-point technique.
4.13.2.3. METHOD - AF POINT-BY-POINT - I
This method uses a variable frequency audio signal genera-

tor, an accurate frequency meter, and a power meter or true
rms voltmeter as shown in figure 4.13.2.1. The signal genera-
tor supplies a known input voltage at a variety of frequencies
to the audio section of the receiver. The power meter or volt-
meter measures the audio output level. The generator output
level is adjusted to maintain constant output power from the
receiver. The gain of the audio section is measured at various
selected frequencies. Audio frequency response is the graphical
plot of audio gain versus measurement frequency.
342
73
O
I
+>
C
-H
O
ai
+J
fi
•H
O
04
0)
(0
c:
o
cu
CO
0)
o
fl
<u
(U
o
-H
o
M-l
D4
o I
-P
O I— 0)
=3; CO
-p
w
(U
CJ3 Eh
H
Cm
343
under best conditions, and range from approximately 0.7 dB
to 2 dB under typical conditions. The method uses commonly
2. Frequency meter
4a. AF power meter
OR,
4b. A.C. voltmeter
1. Connect the output port of the SIGNAL GENERATOR through


output port of the receiver. Connect the A.C. VOLTMETER across
this resistor.
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R^, to the audio output port
of the receiver.
344
output
ut power,
pc . The voltage to be measured is given by the
equation
E =\/P Ro .
o ^ o £
OR,

output power, P^.
4. Tune the signal generator to a frequency, f^, near

that at which the audio gain is maximum.
Adjust the output level of the signal generator to

6.
produce reference audio output power, P^.
7. Determine the available power, P , from the generator.

a
Use the equation
P
a
= —R
4
g
where is the open circuit voltage and R^ is the output

8. Calculate the gain, G(f^), in decibels, at frequency

f by the equation
m ,
G(fJ = 10 log â .
9 . Tune the generator to a new measurement frequency above

(or below) f^. The frequency change is somewhat arbitrary and
depends upon the degree of detail with which it is desired to
know the frequency response.
345
. .
10. Adjust the generator output level to produce reference

audio output power, P^.
11. Determine the generator available power, P , at the new

a
measurement frequency.
12. Calculate the audio gain as in Step 8, above.
13. Proceed as indicated in Steps 9 and 12, above, until

the desired audio frequency range is covered, or until the
measured audio gain is unity (0 dB)
14. Plot the audio gain, G, in decibels, as a function of

measurement frequency on rectilinear graph paper, This plot is
the audio frequency response of the receiver.
1. Record the measurement frequencies, f, in hertz or

kilohertz.
2. Record the reference audio output power, P^ , in

milliwatts or watts.
3. Record the generator available powers, P a , in

milliwatts or watts

following:
1. Uncertainty, AP , in the measured value of P^
346
.
2. Uncertainty, IP , in the measured value of P

a a
The total relative uncertainty, iG(dB), in decibels,

in the gain, G, is given approximately, for small uncertainties,
by the equation
/ IP -P \
AG (dB) = 10 log (l + +
j
o a
Uncertainties IP and IP are obtained from the manufacturer's

o a
respectively
347
.
4.13.2.4. METHOD - AF POINT-BY-POINT - II
This method uses a variable frequency audio signal generator,

an accurate frequency meter, and a power meter or true rms volt-
meter as shown in figure 4.13.2.2. The signal generator supplies
a constant known input voltage at a variety of frequencies to the
audio section of the receiver. The power meter or voltmeter mea-
sures the audio output level. The gain of the audio section is
measured at various selected frequencies. Audio frequency
response is the graphical plot of audio gain versus measurement
frequency
/Measurement uncertainties as small as 0.5 dB are possible

2 dB under typical conditions. The method uses commonly avail-
able test equipment.
2. Frequency meter
4a. AF power meter '
OR,
4b. A.C. voltmeter
348
o
(U
-p
c;
-^^
o
cu
I
+J
o
1—1 Cd
-H
LlJ
h- o O
04
cC I—
^ oo
o 0)
CO
q: lu
o
<D
Pi
X >i
U
:3
0)
>-
o
LU O O P4
UJ LlJ
=) I—
O
-H
Cr LlJ ^3
LlJ n
LU =a: I CD o <
Cd T
o
M-l
a*
-p
0)
Cd
o w
O
>—
I— -p
' =a;
ui
(D
:d lu
=a: ^ Eh
LU
CD
CM
Cm
349


output port of the receiver. Connect the A.C. VOLTMETER across
this resistor.
OR,

of the receiver.

equation
OR,

output power, P
o
4. Tune the signal generator to a frequency, f^, near that

at which the audio gain is maximum.
350
. .
6. Adjust the output level of the signal generator to produce

reference audio output power, P .

a
Use the equation
2
E.
^
P =
a 4 R
g
where E. is the open circuit voltage and R is the output

1 g
8. Calculate the gain, G(f in decibels at frequency f

^ m ), ^ m ,
by the equation
G (y = 11 log .
9 . Tune the generator to a new measurement frequency above

(or below) f^. The frequency change is somewhat arbitrary and
know the frequency response
10. With the generator available power the same as in Step

7/ above, measure the power, P^ , delivered to the termination
resistor at the new measurement frequency
11. Calculate the audio gain by the equation
P.
G (fj = 10 log .
12. Proceed as indicated in Steps 9 through 11, above, until

the desired audio frequency range is covered, or until the measured
audio gain is unity (0 dB)
351
: .
13. Plot the audio gain, G, in decibels, as a function of

measurement frequency on rectilinear graph paper, This plot is
the audio frequency response of the receiver.
1. Record the measurement frequencies, f, in hertz or

kilohertz.
2. Record the delivered audio output power, P^ , in

milliwatts or watts,
3. Record the generator available power, P , in milliwatts.

a
The principal sources of measurement area are the

following
1. Uncertainty, AP^, in the measured value of P^

^ a a
The total relative uncertainty, AG(dB), in decibels, in

the gain, G, is given approximately, for small uncertainties,
by the equation
AG (dB) = 10 lo
Uncertainties AP^ and AP are obtained from the manufacturer's

d a
respectively
352
. .
4.13.2.5. METHOD - AF SWEPT-FREQUENCY
This method uses a swept- frequency audio signal generator

and an oscilloscope as shov/n in figure 4.13.2.3. The generator
receiver. The oscilloscope displays the receiver's output
signal which represents the frequency response of the receiver's
audio section. Also, the generator supplies a linear sweeping
voltage for the horizontal deflection circuits of the oscillo-
scope. A camera is used to photograph the oscilloscope display
to obtain a permanent record of the audio frequency response
characteristic
This is a qualitative measurement method, and measurement

uncertainties may range from 10% to 100%, depending upon circum-
stances. The method uses equipment that is commercially avail-
able, but which may not be included in the average laboratory
inventory
1. Swept-f requency audio signal generator
3. Linear AF detector
1. Connect the output port of the SV7EPT -FREQUENCY GENERATOR

through a cable to the receiver's AF gain control. Break the
connection between this gain control and the circuit preceding
the control.
353
1
3d
o q:
o o
c
o
_l
_l 1—
I-H cc
<_> LiJ
>
o
?
cn
o
1—
UJ Ll_ C_3
ea: UJ
—
1
I—
_l
DE
2:
o
I-H
1—
ct 1—
o
2:
l-H I-H
ER RE
1—
CD
Ll- 1— _i -J
•a: ID o o
UJ
o o; >
> I-H Z Q.
I-H
UJ A<
1
U_ ct o EE
CD c_>
C_)
UJ SW
q;
:ar
f-H
354
.
2. Connect TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance equal

tJie

output port of the receiver.
3. Interconnect the receiver output, DETECTOR, and

OSCILLOSCOPE as shown in figure 4.13.2.3.
4. Connect the sweeping voltage output from the generator

to the horizontal input terminals of the oscilloscope.
5. Adjust the output level of the sweep generator, the

sweep width of the sweep generator, and the vertical and horizontal
gains of the oscilloscope to produce a display of the detected
receiver output signal having sufficient size to fill the square
measurement area of the oscilloscope screen. The generator output
level is adjusted to provide a convenient or selected input signal
voltage, E^ to the audio section that is within the linear range
,
of the audio amplifier.
6. Having obtained a suitable display, photograph or trace

the display. This is the audio frequency response of the receiver.
7. Calibrate the vertical axis, in volts per centimeter,

with a signal from a square-wave calibration source. Record this
information on the back of the photograph.
8. Calibrate the horizontal axis, in hertz per centimeter,

with the marker generators provided in the sweep generator.
Record this information on the back of the photograph.
1. Record the generator input signal voltage, E^, in volts.
2. Record the vertical scale factor in volts per

centimeter
355
.
3. Record the horizontal scale factor in hertz per

centimeter
Because this is a qualitative measurement method, no error

analysis is given. However, the measurement uncertainty may be
estimated from the manufacturer's specifications on the test
equipment used.
4.13.2.6. METHOD - RF POINT-BY-POINT
This method uses an amplitude or frequency modulated signal

generator and a power meter or true rms voltmeter as shown in
figure 4.13.2.4. The signal generator supplies a known input
voltage to the receiver at the measurement frequency, modulated
with a known audio frequency signal. The voltmeter or power
meter indicates the receiver output signal level.
The audio modulation frequency is varied while maintaining

a constant modulation percentage or deviation, and the receiver
output level is measured as a function of this frequency. The
relative response of the output signal is the audio frequency
response of the overall receiver.


modulation
2. Audio frequency signal generator
356
1 1
o
1—
oc
LU O
h- 0 J—
a: y- UJ LU LU
to z:
1— —
1
h-
_J
o O LU 0)
a. z:
UJ 0
UJ
\—
>
cn
o
cn
0)
A >i
u
0
D£ O U
O
-H
<_> T!
LU
O
mo
O.
?J
>~
o -P
(U
C_) CD LU LU 02
z 2: ZD I—
<: I— q; CTLU +J
Q
LU O 3
O I
UJ s:
0)
Q. I— h- EH
S ct UJ
CN
—J »—
o O
O H-
<c
z: d;
< l-Hcc
Q q;
CD LU Z3 UJ [X4
I— I Z
LU
< 2:
00 LU
CD CD
357
3. Frequency meter
6a. AF power meter
OR, *

at the measurement frequency, f^ . If the signal generator
output impedance equals Z^, no matching network is required.

to the specified load resistance, R,^ , and a power rating in excess
output port of the receiver. Connect the TRUE RMS VOLTMETER
OR,
2b. Connect the POWER METER, having an inout imoedance equal

to the specified load resistance, R,^ , to the audio outout port
of the receiver.

equation
=\} P R„ .
o ' o £
358
.
OR,

output power, P^.
4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXXI


adjust the amplitude modulation in the signal generator to
30% at 100 0 Hz, using the external AUDIO SIGNAL GENERATOR.
OR,

adjust the frequency modulation in the signal generator to
± 60% of rated system deviation at 1000 Hz, using the external
AUDIO SIGNAL GENERATOR.

value within the dynamic range (cf.) of the receiver, and the
AF gain control to a value within the linear range of its audio
amplifier, to produce reference audio output power, .
8. Tune the audio signal generator to a new measurement

frequency, f, above (or below) 10 00 Hz. The frequency change is
somewhat arbitrary and depends upon the degree of detail with
which it is desired to know the frequency response.
9. Measure the power, P^ delivered to the termination

,
resistor, R , at this new modulation frequency.
359
. ,
TABLE XXXXI
Audio Frequency Response RF Method
Control Setting
2 . Frequency Tuning 2 . As desired
3 Antenna Trimmer ,
3. Peak
4 . RF Gain ^
4. Maximum
5 IF Gain 5. Maximum
AF Gain 6 . As required
7 Line Gain 7 . Optional
8 . Detector Mode 8. AM or FM , as required
11 IF Bandwidth X -L • rT.o LI t- o X i. t; LI
12 . AF Bandwidth 12 . As desired
15 . AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . AGC
360
.
10. Proceed as indicated in Steps 8 and 9, above, until the

desired audio frequency range is covered, or until the measurement
results become meaningless because of insufficient signal-to-noise
ratio
11. Calculate the relative output level by selecting the

maximum measured delivered power, (max) , and calculating
the ratios, R(f)/ in decibels, of P^(max) to each of the other
measured levels at audio frequencies, f. Use the equation,
P^ (max)
R(f) =
P^(f)
where P^(f) is the measured delivered power at frequency f.
12. Plot the power ratio, R, in decibels, as a function of

audio frequency, f, on rectilinear graph paper. This plot is the
audio frequency response of the receiver.

megahertz


4a. Record the output voltage, E^ in volts
OR,
4b. Record the reference output power, P^, in watts
361
5. Record the open circuit signal voltage, , in
6. Record the audio modulation frequencies, f, in hertz

or kilohertz.
7. Record the delivered audio output power, P^, in

8. Record the ratio, R(f), in decibels, for each

modulation frequency, f.
4.13.2.6 .4. MEASUREMENT ERRORS
The principal measurement error is the uncertainty, AP^

in the measured value of P^. The total uncertainty, AR(dB),
in decibels, in the ratio, R(f), is given approximately,
for small measurement uncertainties, by the equation
AR (dB) = 10
d
Uncertainty AP^ is obtained from the manufacturer's
d
specifications on the AF power meter or rms voltmeter.
362
.
4 . 13. 3. AUDIO LINEARITY
a. Linearity of a transducer is the deviation of its transfer

function from a constant value as function of one or more signal
parameters
b. relationship between one system

Transfer function is a
variable and another that enables the second variable to be
determined from the first. (57 IRE 26. S2)
This section on audio linearity is concerned with the change

of audio gain as a function of audio signal level.
4.13.3.2. PURPOSE

linearity of the audio section of surveillance receivers.
This parameter is a measure of the receiver's ability to
amplify a demodulated signal into an output signal of
acceptable quality.
4.13.3.3. METHOD
The method uses an audio signal generator and a power meter

or true rms voltmeter as shown in figure 4.13.3. The signal
generator supplies a known input voltage at the measurement
frequency, f^ , to the audio section of the receiver. The power
meter or voltmeter measures the audio output level.
The audio output power is measured for various levels of

input signal. A plot of output versus input power displays the
deviation of the transfer function from a constant value.
363
1
o
1— cc
cc
UJ
\- o
1
1— cc cc
=C 1— LxJ UJ UJ
3 f—
1 — 1 1— 1—
_J
o O UJ
a- s:
s: 00 U
C£L UJ
llj ai
o
> to
(D
1—
o
^^
r. A
<:
u
mo
Ll- I— O I
-p
o z I— w
u_ <; o -p
CD o to
Eh
o
o I—
<c
Q a:
ZD UJ
<: z
ui
CD
364
This method does not take into account the distortion produced
by the audio amplifier as it is operated in the non-linear region
of its transfer function.

2 dB under typical conditions. The method uses commonly
3a. AF power meter
OR,
4.13.3.5. PROCEDURE


365
.
OR,

to the specified load resistance, R^ to the audio output port ,
of the receiver.
3. Tune the signal generator to the measurement

frequency, f^. This is normally 1000 Hz.
5. With the signal generator output set at zero, measure the

output power, P^ , from the receiver. This will be entirely noise.
6. Adjust the output level of the generator to produce an

audio output power, P^ , that is 100 times (20dB above) P^.
7. Measure the total audio output power, P^ , (i.e., signal

plus noise plus distortion) delivered to the termination
resistor, R„. If P., is measured with the voltmeter, use the
£ d
equation
E
o =V' P dnR,£ ,
'
where E is the voltage

^
across R„
o Z

a
Use the equation
E.2
1
P =
a 4 R ,
g
where E^ is the open circuit voltage and R^ is the output

366
. .
9. Increase the output level of the generator to produce

an audio output level that is a selected amount greater than
, Step 6. The amount selected is somewhat arbitrary, and
know the transfer function.
Measure the delivered power, P^, of Step 9, above, and

10.
calculate the corresponding available power, P from the ,
a
generator.
11. Proceed as indicated in Steps 9 and 10, above, until the

desired power range is covered. Suitable stopping points are
(1) when the delivered power equals the receiver's rated audio
output power, P^, or (2) when the distortion level of the
delivered power reaches a selected value, e.g., 15%.
12. Plot the delivered power, in watts or milliwatts, against

the generator available power, in milliwatts or microwatts, on
rectilinear or log-log graph paper (not semi-log paper) This .
plot displays the linearity of the receiver's audio section. A

point of reference is the generator available power level at
which the plot falls 1 dB below a straight-line extrapolation of
the low-level portion of the curve. This input level is usually
expressed as voltage across the input terminals of the amplifier.
1. Record the measurement frequency, f^ , in hertz or

kilohertz
2. Record the audio output powers, P^ and P^, in milliwatts

or watts
3. Record the generator available powers, P , in milliwatts

a
or watts
367

following:
1. ^'
Uncertainties, AP and AP , in the measured value of
n d^
P and P,
a d

a a
The relative uncertainties, AP (%), AP, (%), and AP (%)

n d a
in percent, in the measured values of P , P , , and P , respectively,
are given by the equations
AP
AP (%) = X 100 ,
n P
n
AP
AP^ (%) = -p^ X 100 ,
AP
AP (%) = X 100 .
a 1:
a
Uncertainties AP , AP,, and AP are obtained from the manufacturer's
n d a
specifications
^ on the instruments used to measure P , AP, , and
n d
AP .
a
368
.
4 . 13 . 4 . AUDIO DISTORTION
Distortion is an undesired change in waveform. (IEEE

STD 100-1972)
The types of distortion that can occur in an audio amplifier

are the follov/ing:
a. Amplitude
b. Amplitude-frequency
c. Delay
d. Harmonic
e. Intermodulation
f. Phase
Types a, d, and e are normally caused by a nonlinearity in the

real part of the transfer function. Types b, c, and f are normally
caused by nonlinearity in the imaginary part of the transfer
function
Distortion is expressed as a percent, referenced to the level

of the audio output povrer.
4.13.4.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to measure the audio

distortion of surveillance receivers caused by NONLINEARITY IN THE
369
.
REAL PART of the transfer function of the receiver's audio section.

The types of distortion generated are amplitude, harmonic, and
intermodulation Distortion is a measure of the receiver's ability
.
to amplify a demodulated signal into an output signal of acceptable

quality
4.13.4.3. METHOD
The method uses an audio signal generator and a distortion

analyzer as shown in figure 4.13.4. The signal generator
supplies a known input voltage at the measurement frequency, f^,
to the audio section of the receiver. The distortion analyzer
measures the percentage distortion at rated audio output power.

typical conditions. The method uses commonly available test
equipment.
4.13.4.4. TEST EQUPMENT REQUIRED
3. Distortion analyzer
4.13.4.5. PROCEDURE

370
I
o
I— ai o q:
\- o
I
(—1UJ o
<S. I— h- M +j
q; >-
I—< I— O -J
o
•Si 00 \- <c
ex: uj oo -z. -p
>— <c
•H
Q
O
•H
<
M
O
<X. ID o
UJ O P
I
-P
u- <: o (D
CD O
-P
W
OH
O
o
h-
•H
Q q:
ID UJ
UJ
CD
371

4. Tune the signal generator to the measurement frequency,

f . This is normally 1000 Hz.
o
6. Adjust the output level of the signal generator to

produce reference audio output power, P^.
7. Adjust the distortion analyzer so that the 1000 Hz

signal generator.
8. Measure the noise plus distortion output power, P^j^^.^^)*
9. Measure the signal voltage, E^, in millivolts, across

the AF gain control.
10. Calculate the percent distortion, D(%) , by the equation
D(%) = ^-^^ X 100 .
o
This is the distortion of the amplifier for a signal of amplitude
E . at frequency f .
4.13.4.6. DATA REQUI RED
1. Record the measurement frequency, f , in hertz or

kilohertz. .
372
.
2. Record tJie input signal voltage, E. , in millivolts.
3. Record the total audio output power, , in milliwatts

or watts
4 . Record the noise plus distortion output power, P

n+d'
in milliwatts or watts.
5. Record the percent distortion, D(%).

following:

o o
2. Uncertainty, AP , in the measured value of P ,

^ n+d ,
n+d
,
The total relative uncertainty, AD(%), expressed as a

percent, in the percent distortion, D(%) , is given by the
equation
AD (%)
Uncertainties AP o and AP are obtained from the manufacturer's

n+d ,
-,
specifications on the distortion analyzer.
373
4.13.5. HUM AND NOISE
Hum and noise are the low-pitched composite tone at the

receiver output caused by fluctuations in the power supply.
Note: Noise is any audible undesired signal present at the
output. (IEEE Std 100-1972)
4.13.5.2. PURPOSE

maximum hum and noise power output of surveillance receivers
due to sources in the detector, audio, and power supply
circuits. Hum and noise power level is expressed as the ratio,
in decibels, below the receiver's reference audio output
power level, P^ . This method does not include hum and noise
from sources in the RF or IF circuits . The amount of hum and
noise power is a measure of the receiver's ability to produce
an output signal of acceptable quality.
4.13.5.3. METHOD
The method uses a power meter or true rms voltmeter as

shown in figure 4.13.5. The receiver gain controls are
adjusted for minimum RF/IF gain and maximum AF gain, and the
total output power is measured. This is the maximum hum and
noise level of the receiver's audio amplifier.

374
•H
O
T3
C
fd
e
tc
o
•H
+j
<u
[/I
-p
a)
ID
H
P4
375
2a. AF power meter
OR,
4.13.5.5. PROCEDURE
la. Connect the TERMINATION RESISTOR having a resistance

OR, -
lb. Connect the POWER METER, having an input impedance

equal to the specified load resistance, R^ , to the audio
output port of the receiver.
2. Adjust the RF/IF gain controls for minimum gain setting.
3. Adjust the AF gain control for maximum gain setting.
4. Set detector switch in desired position. If CW or SSB

mode is selected, set BFO for desired operating conditions.
5. Measure the output power, P^, from the receiver. If

the output level is measured with the voltmeter, compute the
output power by the relation
2
E
p =
n
where E is the true rms output

^ voltage
^ across R
o
376
.
6. Calculate the ratio, R (dB) , in decibels, of the hum

n
and noise power, P , to the reference audio output power, P
bv the equation
P
(dB) = 10 log ô .
R^ (dB) is the hum and noise power, relative to the receiver's

reference output power level, for the chosen operating conditions.
1. Record the reference audio output power, P^ , in milliwatts

or watts
2. Record the measured hum and noise power, P^, in

3. Record the power ratio, R^(dB) , in decibels.
The source of measurement error is the uncertainty,

J AP r , in
n
the measured value of P . The total uncertainty, AR (dB) , in
n n
decibels, in the value of R^(dB), is given approximately, for
small uncertainties, by the equation
AR (dB) = 10
n
^ n '
Uncertainty AP is obtained from the manufacturer's specifications

n
on the power meter or rms voltmeter.
377
.
4.13.6. NOISE LIMITER THRESHOLD
The noise limiter threshold of a receiver is the voltage

level, in volts, at which limiting action begins.
4.13.6.2. PURPOSE

clipping threshold of a noise limiter located in the audio
section of surveillance receivers. The clipping or noise
limiter threshold is a measure of the effectiveness of the
receiver's noise limiter to suppress the interference effects
of static- and pulse- type noise.
This method is not suitable for testing the performance of

pre-demodulator limiter circuits nor circuits having a floating
reference point.
4.13.6.3. METHOD
The method uses a modulated signal generator and an

oscilloscope as shown in figure 4.13.6. The signal generator
supplies a test signal which is clipped by the receiver's
noise limiter and displayed on the oscilloscope. The noise
limiter threshold is determined from the calibrated
oscilloscope display.

typical conditions. The method uses commonly available test
equipment
378
I II
o a:
LU
h- O LU LU
<c \-
rH
I—I I — o O LU O
:e oo Q- s:
OC LU m
LU Qc: 0)
X!
T T Q)
+J
•H
e
1^
(D
U_ I— [fl
<C IDT 1
H
Q- o
LU I "-Ô o
lOOh-
o
i — —
1
1
o »-(
o
o
LU
los:
1^1—
-o O 1-H
L I
o
00
-=c o I
+>
o (U
w
+1
m
2: z^
ct q:
H-* CO
Q :e o
LU O 3
a- 1— I—
s: «=t LU
•H
Em
—I I—
o
CD LU
t/O LU
CD
379

modulation
3. Cathode- ray oscilloscope
4. Terminating resistor for receiver audio output port
5a. AF power meter
'
'
OR,
4.13.6.5. PROCEDURE

2. Connect the OSCILLOSCOPE across the output of the noise

limiter circuit in the receiver.

the resistor.
380
. .
OR,
Connect the POWER METER, having an input impedance equal

3b.
to the specified load resistance, R^ to the audio output port
,
of the receiver.

output power, . The voltage to be measured is given by the
equation
o ^ o Z
OR,

output power, P^
5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXXII
6. Tune the signal generator and the receiver to a suitable

7a. If the measurement is to be made with the receiver in an

AM detector mode (or CW, SSB) , adjust the generator for amplitude
modulation of 30% at 1000 Hz.
OR,
7b. If the measurement is to be made with the receiver in an

FM detector mode, adjust the generator for frequency modulation
of ±60% of rated system deviation at 1000 Hz.
8. With the generator output level set to zero, adjust the

RF , IF, and AF gain controls to their maximum gain settings.
9. Set the noise limiter control to the desired position.
381
TABLE XXXXII
Noise Limiter Threshold
Control Setting
3- Antenna Trimmer 3. Peak
6 . AF Gain 6 . As desired
8. Detector Mode 8. AM, CW, or SSB
10. BFO Frequency 10 . N. A.
13. Noise Limiter 13 . ON

.
10. Increase the generator output level until clipping of

the 1000 Hz demodulated signal just begins as seen on the
oscilloscope display.
11. Note the audio output power from the receiver. If it

exceeds twice the reference output power, reduce the AF gain
control to produce approximately twice reference output power.
12. Increase the generator output level by 6 dB above that

of Step 10 above. This should produce a well-defined clipped
1000 Hz waveform.
13. Determine the positive and negative amplitudes, and

, of the clipped 1000 Hz signal, using the calibrated vertical
scale of the oscilloscope. and are the positive and
negative noise limiter thresholds, respectively, of the receiver
for the limiter setting of Step 9, above.
1. Record the operating conditions of the receiver.
2, Record the positive clipping voltage, , in volts.
3. Record the negative clipping voltage, V , in volts.

AV, in the measured values of and V^. The uncertainty, AV (%),
in percent, in V^ and/or V^, is given by the equation
AV (%) = X 100 .
p ,n
Uncertainty AV is obtained from the manufacturer's specifications

on the calibrator used to calibrate the oscilloscope vertical
scale
383
4.13.7. SQUELCH SENSITIVITY
The audio squelch sensitivity of a receiver is the minimum

value of the standard test input signal source, which, when
modulated at standard test modulation, will open the receiver
squelch. (EIA RS-204)
4.13.7.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this measurement method is to m.easure the

squelch sensitivity of surveillance receivers. This parameter
is a measure of receiver's ability to break squelch on a
weak signal.
4.13.7.3. METHOD
The method uses an amplitude or frequency modulated signal

generator and an audio distortion analyzer as shown in figure
4.13.7. The signal generator supplies a known input voltage
to the receiver at the measurement frequency. The distortion
analyzer measures the power in the audio output from the receiver.
With the generator output level set to zero, the squelch control
is adjusted to reduce the audio noise output power to at least
40 dB below the unsquelched value. Then the generator level is
adjusted to the voltage that causes a continuous audio output
level that is no less than 10 dB below reference output power.
This voltage is the squelch sensitivity of the receiver.
Measurement uncertainties as sm.all as 5% are possible under

384
I
o
1— Q£ o q:
I— O
I
I— UJ
I
<t 1— I— M
Z OO cc >-
— I—
I I O _I
s: oo
Ol LjJ
I-" <:
+J
•H
>
-H
+J
H
M
0)
CO
o
LU O nH
0)
LlJ tJ^
o CO
en u
o
o m
a.
J3
I
-P
(D
CO
C_) CD -P
05
ct 1— q: 0)
O
I
Q Eh
:S
LjJ (_)
Q- I— I—
s: "< LU
H
Ed
—I
o
I—
CD LU
1— I ^
(/I LU
CD
385

modulation
4.13.7.5. PROCEDURE :



4. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXXIII.


adjust the generator for amplitude modulation of 30% at 1000
Hz,
386
TABLE XXXXIII
Squelch Sensitivity
Control Setting
6. AF Gain 6 .
As required
8. Detector Mode 8 . AM, FM, as desired
11L
J • TF R^nrlw
-L CI
J. W X H -f-h
J_> L— X
1 1 >wl i \Ji L 1 1L
J •
14 . Squelch Level 14 . As required
387
.
.
OR, .
6b. If the measurement is to be made on an FM RECEIVER,

adjust the generator for frequency modulation of ±60% of
rated system deviation at 1000 Hz.
7. Set the squelch control for minimum squelch.
8. Measure the 12 dB SINAD SENSITIVITY, E., as outlined

1
in Section 4.1.3. for AM receivers, or Section 4.1.5. for FM
receivers
9. Set the generator output level to zero.
10. Measure the audio output power, P . This will be

n
noise only.
11. Adjust the squelch control to reduce the audio output

power
^ to at least 0.0001 P (40 dB below P or lower if the
) ,
o n
squelch is a triggered system.
12. Increase the generator output to the first (lowest)

level that just produces a continuous audio output power level
that is no less than 10 dB below reference output power, P^.
13. Determine the open circuit signal voltage, E^ , in

if used; otherwise at the output terminals of the generator.
This is the SQUELCH SENSITIVITY of the receiver at frequency f^.

megahertz

388
: .
3. Record tJie value of termination resistance, in

ohms , connected to receiver audio output terminals
5. Record the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity, , in microvolts.
6. Record the output noise power, P^, in milliwatts.
7. Record the squelch sensitivity, , in microvolts.

following

s s

o o

^ n+d ,
n+d
The total relative uncertainty, AEg(%), in the squelch

sensitivity, E^ , expressed as a percent, is given by
the equation

enerator. Uncertainties AP and AP are obtained from the
o n+d
389
4 . 14 . POWER SUPPLY SECTION
Receiver power supply parameters that are of primary interest

are the following:
a. Input power
b. Output voltage
c. Voltage regulation; line and load
d. Ripple and noise
Methods for measuring these parameters are discussed in this

section.
The measurement of power supply parameters alone may not be

meaningful in predicting overall receiver performance. Receiver
parameters that are affected by power supply parameters are best
tested by directly measuring those parameters under various
power supply conditions. The tests given above may be repeated
under conditions of low and high supply voltages to fully assess
the receiver's performance characteristics.
4.14.1. INPUT POWER
Input power is the power, in watts, drawn by the receiver

through its power cable from the primary source of operating
energy. It may be a.c. or d.c, depending upon the design of
the receiver power supply circuit.
390
4.14.1.2. PURPOSE

input power drawn by surveillance receivers during normal
operation. Input power is a measure of the energy required
to operate the receiver.
4.14.1.3. METHOD
The method uses a signal generator, a true rms voltmeter,

and either (a) an a.c. wattmeter for a.c. primary source, or
(b) a voltmeter and ammeter for d.c. primary source as shown
in figure 4.14.1. The signal generator supplies an input signal
to the receiver so as to operate the receiver at maximum rated
audio output power, as indicated by the true rms voltmeter. The
wattmeter or voltmeter-ammeter pair measure the power drawn
from the primary source of energy, such as an a.c. generator
or a storage battery.

conditions. The method uses rudimentary and commonly available
test equipment.
4 . True rms voltmeter
5 . A.C. wattmeter
391
I
o Od
1—1
I— o
I — —
I I
u
Q)
-P
a,
u- 1—
mo
0
UJ
EIV
o I
NT. -P
0 =c
Q)
CO
UJ
0 -U
w
(U
O CD
^^
=c 1— q:
Q ni o
1
UJ c_> :2
D- I— 1—
<UJ tn
H
Cm
o
—I
o o
I—
Q
0
I—I
UJ
z
o o
t/) UJ
03
392
6. D. C. voltmeter
7. D.C. ammeter
4.14.1.5. PROCEDURE
la. For a.c. power source, connect the receiver's power

cord through the A.C. WATTMETER to the primary power source.
OR,
lb. For d.c. power source, connect the receiver's hot

power cable through the D.C. AMI4ETER to the primary power
source and connect the return power cable to the remaining
power source terminal. Connect the D.C. VOLTMETER across the
output terminals of the source. Observe correct polarity.

generator output impedance equals , no transformer is
required.

VOLTMETER across the resistor.
4. Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate the rated

equation
393
. .
5. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXXIV.


to 30% at 1000 Hz.
8. With the RF , IF, and AF gain controls set to their

minimum gain settings, and the function switch set in STANDBY
position, record the wattmeter reading, Pj_g / in watts, or the
D.C. voltmeter and D.C. ammeter readings,
^
V. and I. , in volts
is is
and amperes, respectively.
9. For the d.c. power source, compute the input power,

P^^ , in watts , by the equation
P. = V. I.
IS IS IS
P^^ is the input power drawn by the receiver under standby

conditions
Adjust the receiver RF/IF gain controls to their maximum

10.
gain settings.
to zero, adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce 1%
rated audio output power, P^. This will be noise power only.

rated audio output power, P .
13. Record the wattmeter reading,in watts, or theP. ,

im^
D.C. voltmeter and D.C. ammeter readings, V. and I. in ,
^ im im
volts and amperes, respectively.
394
TABLE XXXXIV
Input Power

-
Control Setting
4 . RF Gain 4. As required
5. IF Gain 5. As required
9 . Beat Frequency Oscillator 9 . As desired
10 . BFO Frequency 10 . Optional
11. IF Bandwidth 11. Optional
12. AF Bandwidth 12. Optional
15 . AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15. As desired
395
: .
14. For the d.c. power supply, compute the input power,
P.
im'
, II
in watts, by the equation
^
P . = V. I
im im im
P^^ is the input power drawn by the receiver under conditions

of rated audio output power.
1. Record rated audio output power, P^ , in milliwatts

or watts . J-
- .
•
^
2. Record standby input power, / in watts.
3. Record standby input voltage, , in volts.
4. Record standby input current, / in amperes.
5. Record maximum input power, ^ watts.

^.x^'
6. Record maximum input voltage, V^^, in volts.
7. Record maximum input current, ^^î in amperes.

following
1. Uncertainty, AP. , in the measured input power, P. or

p.
im
2. Uncertainty, AV .
, in the measured input voltage, V.
or V.
im
396
3. Uncertainty, AI^, m the measured input current,
or I.
im
The relative uncertainty, AP^(%), in percent, in the input

power, p. , is given by the equations
AP.
AP. C%) = X 100 ,
OR
/AV \ /AI.
^î " I "V^ j+ -^^^
V
Uncertainties AP. , AV. , and AI. are obtained from the

manufacturer's specifications on the wattmeter, D.C. voltmeter,
and D.C. ammeter, respectively.
397
4.14.2. OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Output voltage is the voltage, in volts, at the output

terminals of the power supply section of the receiver.
4.14.2.2. PURPOSE

output voltages of the power supply section of surveillance
receivers. Output voltage is a measure of the ability of the
power supply to deliver the energy required by the receiver.
The receiver power supply may provide output voltages

of several different levels and current capacities. This
method is applicable to each individual voltage level.
4.14.2.3. METHOD
The method uses a D.C. voltmeter as shown in figure 4.14.2.

The voltmeter is placed across the selected output terminals
in the power supply, and the voltage indication is read.

test equipment.
1. D.C. voltmeter
398
0)
tT>
nS
+>
iH
O
>
-P
+J
o
^^
O
+>
Q)
W
+>
to
(U
-H
111
399
4.14.2.5. PROCEDURE
1. Adjust the receiver to the desired operating conditions.
2. Set the D.C. VOLTMETER to the highest range setting

provided. Make sure this is greater than the maximum D.C.
voltage delivered by the power supply, as stated in the
receiver's operating manual.
3. Connect the voltmeter to the selected terminals in the

power supply circuit. Observe correct polarity.
4. Measure the D.C. voltage, V, at the selected terminals.

Adjust the range setting as required to give a meter deflection
in the upper two-thirds portion of the scale.
5. Record the measured voltage. This is the output voltage

at the selected terminals of the power supply under the operating
conditions established in Step 1, above.
1. Record selected operating conditions of the receiver.
2. Record each measured D.C. voltage, V, in millivolts or

volts . V

AV, in the measured D.C. voltage, V. The total measurement
uncertainty, AV(%), in percent, in the measured value of voltage,
V, is given by the equation
AV (%) = ^ X 100.
Uncertainty AV is obtained from the manufacturer's specifications

on the D.C. voltmeter.
400
4.14.3. VOLTAGE REGULATION
Voltage regulation is the maximum change in output voltage

as a result of a specified change in line voltage, output load,
temperature, or time.
Voltage regulation is usually expressed in percent of

output voltage level.
4.14.3.2. PURPOSE
The purpose of these measurement methods is to measure the

voltage regulation of receiver power supplies under variations
of line voltage and audio output power. Voltage regulation is
a partial measure of the potential stability and output signal
quality of the receiver.
4.14.3.3. METHOD - LINE REGULATION

a D.C. differential voltmeter, a variable auto- trans former
with voltmeter, and a variable D.C. primary power supply with
voltmeter as shown in figure 4.14.3.1. The signal generator
supplies an input signal to the receiver so as to operate the
receiver at a selected audio output power level, as indicated
by the true rms voltmeter. The D.C. differential voltmeter
measures the receiver's power supply output voltage and the
change therein produced by changes in the primary power supply
voltage. These latter changes are produced by the variable
auto-transformer or the variable D.C. primary power source.
The primary supply line voltage is set to a standard value

and the receiver's power supply output voltage, V , is measured.
401
^
O _l
a.
Q.
<_3 U~>
o q;
1—1 UJ
h- o h-
cC h- iy~> LU
s:
or h- UJ
_j •H-
Q£ UJ o O UJ
•s:
cC 1—
_l
o
_j '
luj a. I
13 I
UJ _1
U_ O
i__2r
UJ
z: z: i>i • I—
cc q: C_5 UJ
Q n: O •
UJ 3
(_)
1—
Q I—
Q- I— _I
s: =c UJ o
o UJ
_J 1— 3 >~
<c <c O _l
; cc:
UJ
• ZD
oo UJ
402
.
Then the primary supply voltage is changed a prescribed amount

and the change in the receiver's power supply output voltage,
AV , is measured. The line regulation
^
is the ratio AV /V ,
o o o
expressed as a percent.

test equipment.

modulation
4. True rms voltmeter
5. D.C. differential voltmeter
6. Variable auto-transme ter , equipped with an

output A.C. voltmeter
7. Variable D.C. power supply, equipped with an

output D.C. voltmeter.
la. For A.C. power source, connect the receiver's A.C.

power cord to the output socket of the VARIABLE AUTO-TRANSFORMER
Connect the auto- trans former to the primary power source.
OR,
403
lb. For D.C. power source, connect the receiver's D.C.
power cord to the output terminals of the VARIABLE D.C. POWER
SUPPLY.
2. Connect the D.C. DIFFERENTIAL VOLTMETER to the selected

terminals in the receiver's power supply. Observe correct
polarity.
3. Set the differential voltmeter to a range that is higher

than the voltage to be measured, as given by the receiver's
operating manual.
4 . Connect the input port of the receiver to the output

NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance, , to the
receiver at the measurement frequency, f^. If the signal generator
output impedance equals , no matching network is required.

6. Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate the rated audio

equation
E =yj P R„ .
o ' o £
7. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXXV.
404
TABLE XXXXV
Voltage Regulation
Control Setting
6. AF Gain 6 . As required
8. Detector Mode 8. AM, FM, as desired
±± . ir Bandwiatn ±1 . Optional
15. AGC/MGC Mode Switch 15 . AGC
405
.


adjust the amplitude modulation in the signal generator to
30% at 10 0 0 Hz.
OR,

adjust the frequency modulation in the signal generator for
±60% of rated system deviation at 1000 Hz.

This may be (a) on standby, (b) operating with zero audio output
power, (c) operating with rated audio output power, (d) operating
at some intermediate audio output power, or (e) operating under
some special mode of operation.
11a. Adjust the auto-transformer for normal operating supply

voltage, , as specfied in the receiver's operating manual.
For example, this may be 115 volts A.C.
OR,
lib. Adjust the variable D.C. power supply for normal

operating supply voltage, , as specified in the receiver's
operating manual. For example, this may be 28 volts D.C.
12. Measure the output voltage, , of the receiver's

power supply as selected in Step 2, above, using the
differential voltmeter.
13. Reduce the supply voltage applied to the receiver to

the lower operating limit specified in the receiver's operating
manual. For example, on A.C. this voltage may be 105 volts; on
D.C. this voltage may be 24 volts.
406
. . . ,
14. Measure the change in cutout vcltage, , of the

oi
receiver's pov/er supply/ using the differential voltmeter.
15. Calculate the relative voltage change, , in percent,

by the equation
AV
R is the receiver's voltage regulation due to a decrease in

1
line voltage for the operating conditions selected in Step 10

above
16. Increase the supply voltage applied to the receiver

to the upper operating limit specified in the receiver's
operating manual. For example, on A.C. this voltage may be
125 volts; on D.C. this voltage may be 32 volts.
17. Measure the change in output voltage, AV , of the

o2
receiver's power suooly, from, the value V obtained in Steo
- ^ ^ o
12, above, using the differential voltmeter.
18. Calculate the relative voltage change, R , in percent,

2
by the equation
IV
R„ (%) = X 100
^ V
o
R^ is the receiver's voltage regulation due to an increase in

line voltage for the operating conditions selected in Step
10 , above
1. Record the selected operating conditions of the

receiver
407
•
2. Record the supply voltages, , in volts.
3. Record the receiver's power supply voltage, V^, in

volts
4. Record the changes in power supply voltage, AV^ , in

millivolts or volts.
5. Record the calculated line voltage regulation, R,

in percent.
4.14.3,3.4. MEASUREMENT ERRORS

following : '
, ^
1. Uncertainty, AV^ , in the supply voltage,
2. Uncertainty, AV , in the measured value of V

o o
3. Uncertainty , A (AV^) , in the measured values of AV^
The total uncertainty, AR(%) , in percent, in the value

of R, is given by the equation
AR
Uncertainties AV , AV , and A(AV ) are obtained from the

s o o
manufacturer's specifications on the several voltmeters used
in this method.
408
4.14.3.4. METHOD - LOAD REGULATION

a D.C. differential voltmeter, a variable auto-transformer
with voltmeter, and a variable D.C. primary power supply with
voltmeter as shown in figure 4.14.3.2. The signal generator
supplies an input signal to tne receiver so as to operate the
receiver at a selected audio output power level, as indicated
by the true rms voltmeter. The D.C. differential voltmeter
measures the receiver's power supply output voltage, , and
the change therein, iV^ , produced by the change in the pov/er
required by the receiver. This change in power is the difference
between the power drav/n under no-signal conditions and the
power under full signal conditions. The load regulation is the
ratio LV /V , expressed
^
as a percent,
^
o o
The primary supply line voltage is set to a standard value

and the receiver's pov7er supply output voltage, , is measured.
Then the load on the receiver's povrer supply is changed a
prescribed amount and the change in the output voltage,
AV , is measured. The load reaulation is the ratio iV /V .
o -
o o

test equipment.

modulation
409
t
UJ
3 >-
O _J
Q. n.
a.
• rD
o
o
I— cc
c LlJ
1^
\- o h-
<C I—
^
t— I—
u~t 2: s:
UJ
o
I
•H
2: oo • I— -P
o O
I
UJ
fa
•
<c t—
2:
H
_l d
o
Q)
0)
I— 
Illj a. I
u
|3 Q- en \— o
I
UJ _1 m
Id. <~n I
U_ O
L_2r ft
=co -p
CD
-P
w
(U
Eh
o e3
z s:
UJ
• I—
=a: -H ti: C_J UJ
Q o • s
UJ (_) 3 Q 1—
Q- I— I—
o
I
s: car uu
o
—I I— 3 >- fa
<c <c O _J
z q;
CD LlJ
1—1 ^
1/1 UJ
410
. .
4 . True rms voltmeter
5. D.C. differential voltmeter
6. Variable auto-transmeter , equipped with an

output A.C. voltmeter
7. Variable D.C. power supply, equipped with an

output D.C. voltmeter.
1. Connect the receiver's power cord to either the VARIABLE

AUTO-TRANSFORMER (A.C. power cord) or the VARIABLE D.C. POWER
SUPPLY (D.C. power cord).
2. Connect the D.C. DIFFERENTIAL VOLTMETER to the selected

terminals in the receiver's power supply. Observe correct
polarity
3. Set the differential voltmeter to a range that is higher

than the voltage to be measured, as given by the receiver's
operating manual

NETWORK that provides the specified source impedance, , to the
receiver at the measurement frequency, f^. If the signal generator
output impedance equals Z^j no matching network is required.

the resistor.
411
, . .
6 . Set the voltmeter on a range to indicate the rated output

power P . The voltage to be measured is given by the equation
E =v/p~r7 .
o ^ o £
7. Set receiver controls as given in Table XXXXVf P* 405.


adjust the frequency modulation in the signal generator
to 30% at 1000 Hz.
OR,

adjust the frequency modulation in the signal generator
for ±60% of rated system deviation at 1000 Hz.
Adjust the A.C. or D.C. supply voltage to the receiver

10.
for normal operating supply voltage, as specified in the ,
receiver's operating manual. For example, on A.C. this may be

115 volts; on D.C. this may be 28 volts.
11. Put the receiver in operating condition, but set the

RF , IF, and AF gain controls to their minimum gain settings.
12. Measure the output voltage, , of the receiver's

power supply, using the differential voltmeter.
Adjust the receiver RF/IF gain controls to their maximum

13.
gain settings
412
. .
to zero, adjust the receiver AF gain control to produce 1%
rated audio output power, . This will be noise power only.

rated audio output power, .
16. Measure the change in output voltage, AV^ , of the

receiver's power supply, using the differential voltmeter.
17. Calculate the relative voltage change, r(%) , in per-

cent, by the equation
AV
R(%) = X 100 .
is the receiver's voltage regulation due to a change in

power supply load from minimum to maximum load, for the
operating condition selected in Step 11, above.
1. Record the selected operating conditions of the

receiver
2. Record the supply voltages, , in volts.
3. Record the receiver's power supply voltage, , in

volts
4. Record the changes in power supply voltage, AV^, in

millivolts or volts.
5. Record the calculated load voltage regulation, R,

in percent.
413
:

following
1. Uncertainty/ -^^g / supply voltage,
2. Uncertainty, AV , in the measured value of V

o o
3. Uncertainty, A (AV ), in the measured values of AV

o o
The total uncertainty, AR(%), in percent, in the value

of R, is given by the equation
AR (%)
Uncertainties AV , AV , and A (AV ) are obtained from the

s o o
manufacturer's specifications on the several voltmeters used
in this method.
414
4 . 14 . 4 . RIPPLE AND NOISE
Power supply ripple and noise is the total rms A.C. voltage
that appears superimposed upon the D.C. output voltage.
4.14.4.2. PURPOSE

ripple and noise voltage of receiver povrer supplies. Ripple
and noise voltages are a potential source of hum and noise
interference in the receiver, and can reduce the quality of
the audio output povrer.
4.14.4.3. METHOD
The m.ethod uses a true rm.s voltm.eter and a cathode-ray

oscilloscope as shovrn in figure 4.14.4. The voltm.eter is placed
across the selected output terminals in the receiver povrer
supply, and the ripple and noise voltage is read. The
oscilloscope displays the A.C. voltage waveform to reveal the
presence of deleterious voltage spikes or oscillations.

conditions . The method uses rudim.entary and commonly available
test equipment.
1. True rms voltmeter
415
0)
CO
•H
o
S
(0
0)
•H
u
o
M-l
+J
0)
w
p
(0
0)
d LU d Eh
>
oQ
Q.
-zr.
00
o
o
•H
{14
416
. .
4.14.4.5. PROCEDURE
2. Set the TRUE RMS VOLTMETER to the highest range setting

provided. Make sure this is greater than the maximum D.C. voltage
delivered by the power supply, as stated in the receiver's
operating manual
3. Connect the voltmeter and the OSCILLOSCOPE, in parallel,

to the selected terminals in the power supply circuit.
4. Measure the A.C. voltage, , at the selected terminals.

Adjust the range setting as required to give a meter deflection
in the upper two-thirds portion of the scale.
5. Record the measured voltage, . This is the rms value

of the ripple and noise voltage at the selected terminals of
the power supply under the operating conditions established in
Step 1, above.
6. The oscilloscope display provides information about

the ripple and noise waveform. It can yield the peak value
of voltage excursions and the nature of the ripple and noise.
1. Record the operating conditions of the receiver.
2. Record the ripple and noise voltage, V^, in millivolts

or volts
417

AV^ , in the measured value of V^. The total uncertainty, AV^(%),
in percent, in the value of , is given by the equation
^ '•
AV
AV^ (%) = X 100 .
Uncertainty AV^ is obtained from the manufacturer's specifications

on the rras voltmeter.
NOTE: If the frequency range of the rms voltmeter

extends to zero frequency (D.C.) , connect a
D.C. blocking capacitor in series with the
voltmeter's ungrounded terminal when meas-
; uring V .
418
5.0. TEST EQUIPMENT
5.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Test equipment of the types required to perform the

measurements described in this handbook must measure a variety
of quantities over the frequency range of D.C. to 00 MHz or
]
higher. Such equipment has become fairly well standardized,

and a wide range of types and quality is available.
Because the quality of a measurement depends ultimately

upon the quality of the test apparatus, the highest quality
instruments, commensurate with the desired results, should
be chosen. Give close attention to such matters as shielding,
filtering, mechanical stability, electrical stability, control
smoothness, display readability, and operating convenience.
Most test methods require interconnecting several pieces of
apparatus, and their compatibility and operating ease in a
complex measurement system can be an important factor.
5.2. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A listing of all the technical specifications of the

relevant test equipment, including the routine as well as
the unique requirements, is beyond the scope of this
handbook. Most requirements are well known by knowledgeable
technicians. This section will cover only those special
requirements that are critical to the procedures included in
Section 4.0.
419
..
5.2.1. RF SIGNAL GENERATORS
5.2.1.1. HARMONIC AND SPURIOUS OUTPUT
Harmonic and spurious output should be at least 30 dB

below the desired signal. Certain tests, such as spurious
response and intermodulation , require better than this.
External filters may be used to obtain the necessary signal
purity
5.2.1.2. LEAKAGE
Low leakage is essential. The generator must have adequate

shielding and filtering. Safe leakage levels vary from one test
to another, and cannot be specified. However, each test set-up
can and should be checked for leakage by observing the receiver
response (a) to the generated signal with the output control
set to zero, and (b) to changes in the test configuration. If
evidence of leakage is found, provide additional shielding
(e.g., a shielded box) and filtering (e.g., in the power line an
interconnecting cables).
5.2.2. VOLTMETERS
5.2.2.1. TRUE RMS VOLTMETERS
True rms voltmeters are required to measure the rms value

of random noise signals and signals comprised of a mixture of
random and non-random signals. Conventional voltmeters, which
contain an envelope detector, averaging circuits, and whose
output is displayed as an equivalent rms value, give inaccurate
measurements of random and semi-random signals. Conventional
voltmeters may be used to indicate a reference level of
random signals, or of semi-random signals when the mix does
not vary, but a true rms meter should be used to MEASURE such
levels
420
5.2.2.2. D.C. DIFFERENTIAL VOLTMETERS
Power supply regulation can best be measured with a

differential voltmeter because of its superior resolution.
If a differential voltmeter is unavailable, one can be
simulated with a stable, variable D.C. voltage source in
series with a sensitive, low-range voltmeter.
5.2.3. IMPEDANCE METERS
Conventional RF impedance bridges often give erroneous

results when measuring the impedance of an active network.
The cause of this is the large signal voltage across the network
that is required to obtain adequate bridge detector sensitivity
at null. The large voltage may alter the operating point of the
active device in the network, and the impedance may then become
a function of the bridge voltage. The solution is to decrease
the voltage needed across the active network terminals.
The vector impedance meter technique maintains good

sensitivity even with small signal levels. It has been found
suitable for many applications where an impedance bridge gives
variable results.
5.2.4. IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORKS
An impedance matching network may consist of (a) an impedance

transformer, or (b) a resistive matching network. A transformer
has a low insertion loss, but tends to be narrow band. A resistive
matching network is generally broad band, and for many measurements
its higher insertion loss is of no consequence.
The electrical characteristics of any matching network must

be known so that the measurement results can be corrected for its
effects in the test set-up.
421
..
5.2.5. ISOLATION NETWORKS
An isolation network may be required between a frequency meter

and the point of measurement to prevent the input impedance of
the frequency meter from affecting the other parts of the measurement
system. Suitable networks include the following:
. a. Attenuator network
b. Directional coupler
c. High-impedance probe
d. Signal splitter
The network is chosen on the basis of frequency, circuit impedance,

and signal level.
5.2.6. COMBINING NETWORKS
Combining networks are required when two or more signal

generators are connected into a common circuit. A variety
of means can be used to combine sources. These include the
following:
Resistive summing networks

b. Hybrid multi-port networks
c Directional couplers
d. Signal splitters (in reverse)
e Attenuator networks
Multi-tap transformers
The particular choice of combining network is selected on the

basis of frequency, circuit impedance, signal level, and
number of signal sources to be combined.
422
5.2.7. INSERTION NETWORKS
An insertion network is used to inject a test signal into,

or extract a signal from, a receiver via a power, audio, or
interconnecting cable. It must provide a known coupling ratio
between input and output terminals, and must not adversely
disturb the circuit into which it connects. Suitable networks
include the following:
a. Transformer
b. R-C coupling network
c. L-C coupling network
The particular choice and design of insertion network is

selected on the basis of frequency, circuit impedance, signal
level, load current, and cable configuration. The electrical
characteristics of the network can be determined by
measurement using standard procedures.
5.2.8. LINE IMPEDANCE NETWORKS
A line impedance network is used to extract a signal from

a receiver via the power cable for conducted interference meas-
urements. A suitable network for use from 300 kHz to 25 MHz has
been described by the IEEE (56 IRE 27. SI) and its schematic is
,
shown in figure 5.2.8. The installation and use of this network

is described in the standard cited above.
For frequencies below 300 kHz and above 25 MHz, a similar

network with suitable component values may be designed.
423
I
o
eC UJ
>- CtL
<: o
I—
D_ UJ
oo
M
U
O
Q)
O
C
(d
Q)
g
H
0)
00
•H
En
O D_
Q_ LU
O
a:
424
. .
5.3. INVENTORY REQUIREMENTS
A complete list of the major equipment required to

perform these test procedures is given in Table XXXXVI
Minor items, such as cables, connectors, test leads, probes,
etc., are not listed because a qualified technician will
know what is required.
5.3.1. EQUIPMENT IN USASATEC INVENTORY
Of the required equipment, those items that are listed in

the USASATEC Electronic Equipment Catalog (dated March 1970;
updated through August 1, 1972) are identified in Table XXXXVI
by "Yes." These items are believed to be suitable for these
test procedures, based upon the descriptions given in the
catalog
5.3.2. EQUIPMENT NOT IN USASATEC INVENTORY
Major equipment not listed in the USASATEC catalog are

identified in Table XXXXVI by "No." Items marked with an
asterisk (*) are not listed in the catalog, but can be
readily obtained either by purchase or by building them in
the electronics shop. Items marked with a double asterisk
(**) are not available in the USASATEC inventory in models
sufficient to cover the complete frequency range or level
range required by these procedures. All of this equipment
is discussed below.
5.3.2.1. DETECTOR, AF
The af detector is used to rectify the audiofrequency

signal from the receiver before presentation to the oscillo-
scope in the swept-f requency method of testing for audio-
frequency response. A standard detector circuit is suitable
here, e.g., a half-wave rectifier using a semiconductor
diode and having an input frequency range of approximately
10 to 10,000 Hz.
425
,,, ,
TABLE XXXXVI
Test Equipment Requirements
Type of Equipment Listed in ASA Catalog
1. Analyzer distortion, AF Yes

2. Antennas Yes
3. Attenuator , fixed, 3, 30, 54, and 60 dB Yes
4. Attenuator , variable, AF Yes
5. Attenuator , variable, IF Yes
6. Attenuator , variable, RF Yes
7. Autotransf ormer variable, 60 Hz power
, Yes
8. Bridge, RF impedance Yes
9 . Camera, oscilloscope Yes
10 . Detector AF *
11. Detector IF, envelope, 2 ea. matched *
12 Detector IF, FM, 2 ea. matched *

.
13. Detector null, RF Yes

14. Filter, variable band pass, AF Yes
15. Filter, power line *
16 . Generator audiofrequency Yes

17. Generator noise, hot/cold **
18. Generator noise, temperature-limited diode No

19. Generator signal, RF, AM Yes
20 . Generator signal, RF, CW Yes
21. Generator signal, RF , FM **
22. Generator swept-f requency , AF No

23 . Generator swept-f requency , RF **
24. Indicator signal level Yes

25. Meter, AC voltmeter Yes
26 . Meter , AC wattmeter Yes
27. Meter, AF power Yes
28 . Meter, automatic noise figure **
426
Table XXXXVI (contd.)
Type of Equipment Listed in ASA Catalog
29. Meter, DC ammeter Yes

30. Meter, DC differential voltmeter Yes
31. Meter, DC voltmeter Yes
32. Meter, field intensity Yes
33. Meter, frequency counter Yes
34. Meter, IF power **
35. Meter, RF voltmeter Yes

36. Meter, selective RF voltmeter No
37. Meter, true RMS Yes
38. Meter, vector impedance No
39. Network, combining, AF , 3-port *
40. Network, combining, RF , 3-port **
41. Network, combining, RF , 4-port *
42. Network, impedance matching, RF **
43. Network, line impedance *
44. Network, insertion *
45. Network, isolation *
46. Oscilloscope, DC Yes

47. Oscilloscope, dual channel Yes
48. Oscilloscope, wide band Yes
49. Power supply, variable DC Yes
50. Printer, digital No
51. Switch, coaxial *
52. Termination, resistive, AF load *
Termination, resistive, RF input, shielded *

53.
427
:
5.3.2.2. DETECTOR, IF, ENVELOPE
The test procedure for time delay for an AM receiver

requires two matched envelope detectors which operate at
the receiver's intermediate frequency. These detectors may
be constructed using standard AM detector circuits with
components matched to within approximately 5% or less.
5.3.2.3. DETECTOR, IF, FM
The test procedure for time delay for an FM receiver

requires two matched FM detectors which operate at the
receiver's intermediate frequency. These detectors may
be constructed using standard FM detector circuits with
components matched to within approximately 5% or less.
5.3.2.4. FILTER, POWER LINE
This filter may be one of many standard radio frequency

interference filters designed for this purpose. It should
provide at least 40 dB attenuation to rf signals from 10 kHz
to 100 MHz, and have a voltage and current rating suitable
for the receiver under test.
5.3.2.5. GENERATOR, NOISE, HOT/COLD
Fixed- temperature random noise generators, suitable for

these test procedures, are not available at USASATEC for use
below 10 MHz. A suitable generator for this range would
have the following specifications
a. Frequency range: 0 Hz to above 10 0 MHz
b. Hot noise temperature: 373 K ± 1 K
c. Cold noise temperature: 77 K ± 1 K
428
:
5.3.2.6. GENERATOR, NOISE, TEMPERATURE-LIMITED DIODE
Commercial temperature-limited diode noise generators,

suitable for these test procedures, are available with the
following brief specifications:
a. Frequency range: 100 kHz to 500 MHz
b. Noise temperature range: 300 K to 12,000 K
c. Source Impedance: 50 ohms
d. . VSWR: <1.05
e. Accuracy: Approximately 3% or better
5.3.2.7. GENERATOR, SIGNAL, RF , FM
The USASATEC catalog does not list any FM signal

generators with frequency coverage below approximately
20 MHz. The specifications required to perform these test
procedures are generally the same as for FM signal generators
on hand, but with coverage extending to the lowest radio
frequency of interest.
5.3.2.8. GENERATOR , SWEPT-FREQUENCY AF
A swept-f requency signal generator for testing audio-

frequency response by the swept-f requency method will have
the following brief specifications
a. Frequency range: 20 Hz to 20 kHz
b. Sweep width: 0 to 20 kHz
c. Output voltage: 1 volt rms into 50 ohms
d. Horizontal output: 5 volts, peak-to-peak, sawtooth
Such a generator is available from commercial suppliers.
429
. .
5.3.2.9. GENERATOR, SWEPT-FREQUENCY , RF
The USASATEC catalog does not list any rf swept-

frequency generators with frequency coverage below approxi-
mately 700 kHz. The specifications required to perforin
these test procedures are generally the same as for rf
swept-f requency generators on hand, but with coverage
extending to the lowest radio frequency of interest.
5.3.2.10. METER, AUTOMATIC NOISE FIGURE
The USASATEC catalog does not list any automatic

noise figure meters with frequency coverage below 10 MHz.
This is the lowest frequency available with commercial
meters; therefore, no procurement recommendations are
made at this time
5.3.2.11. METER, IF POWER
The USASATEC catalog does not list any IF power meters

for measuring power levels below 10 mw full scale. Commer-
cial power meters are available with adequate sensitivities
for use over most of the frequency range required by these
test procedures
5.3.2.12. METER, SELECTIVE RF VOLTMETER
A selective rf voltmeter for measuring conducted

emission may consist of a stable radio receiver having
an accurate signal level meter calibrated in microvolts.
Suitable available instruments include field intensity
meters, and selective voltmeters designed for this pur-
pose. Communications receivers are often not suitable
for this purpose because of an inaccurate metering system.
430
5.3.2.13. METER, VECTOR IMPEDANCE
Commercial vector impedance meters, suitable for these

test procedures, are available with the following brief
specifications :
a. Frequency range: 5 Hz to 100 MHz
b. Impedance range: 1 ohm to 10 0 K ohms
c. Phase angle range: 0 to ±90 degrees
d. Accuracy: Impedance: ±5% or better

Phase angle: ±6 degrees or better
5.3.2.14. NETWORK, COMBINING
Commercial 3-port and 4-port combining networks are

available that cover much of the frequency range used in
these test procedures. When commercial networks are
unavailable, suitable networks can normally be assembled
in the electronics shop using standard circuits. See
Section 5.2.6. for a list of suitable networks.
5.3.2.15. NETWORK, IMPEDANCE MATCHING, RF
Commercial impedance matching networks are available

for standard line impedances. Non-standard impedances
can be matched by building-out the required impedance with
resistive networks.
5.3.2.16. NETWORK, LINE IMPEDANCE
A suitable line impedance network is described in

Section 5.2.8.
431
5.3.2.17. NETWORK, INSERTION AND ISOLATION
Insertion and isolation networks are discussed in

Sections 5.2.7. and 5.2.5., respectively.
5.3.2.18. PRINTER, DIGITAL

<
Commercial digital printers are available for printing

the readout from the digital frequency counter used in
these procedures.
5.3.2.19. SWITCH, COAXIAL
Commercial coaxial switches are available that are

suitable for use in these test procedures.
5.3.2.20. TERMINATION, RESISTIVE, AF LOAD
The af output port termination resistor may be any non-

inductive resistor having the specified resistance and the
power rating, or greater, required by the receiver.
5.3.2.21. TERMINATION, RESISTIVE, RF INPUT
The rf input port termination resistor may be any

low-noise, non-inductive, shielded resistor having the
specified resistance and a VSWR of 1.0 5 or less at the
measurement frequency. It shall be fitted with a connector
that mates with the receiver's input connector.
432
. .
5.4. CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS
5.4.1. CALIBRATION SCHEDULE
Test equipment must be calibrated periodically to insure

that the expected performance is actually obtained. A regular
calibration schedule should be established for each instrument,
and followed faithfully. The schedule is based on the type of
equipment and the amount of use it gets. Typically, intervals
between calibrations range from 30 days to two years. No specific
schedules can be given that apply to all laboratories, but
schedules for equipment in a given laboratory can be based
upon the following considerations:
a. Recalibrate as recommended by the manufacturer of the

instrument
b. Analyze the calibration history of an instrument to

determine if and how much it was out of calibration when
recalibrated. Base the new schedule on the results of this
historical study.
An instrument may be recalibrated at times other than the

scheduled periodic calibration for the following reasons:
a. Obviously faulty performance.
b. Recal ibration following repairs, readjustments, or

replacement of parts
c. Recalibration prior to a critical measurement.
d. Recalibration following return from being loaned to

another group.
433
5.4.2. CALIBRATION INFORMATION
To be useful, the calibration report must contain the

following minimum information:
{.
a. The VALUE of the quantity being measured (voltage,

frequency, attenuation, dial correction, scale factor, etc.)
expressed in units consistent with the readings on the
instrument.
b. The calibration UNCERTAINTY in the value of the quan

tity being measured. This includes both the systematic
uncertainty and the random uncertainty, stated separately,
and expressed either in the units of the quantity being
measured, in percent, or in decibels.
c. The test conditions prevailing during the measure-

ment .
With this information, the absolute accuracy of the

instrument is known, and its behavior can be intelligently
evaluated over a period of time.
434
6.0. RECOMMENDATIONS
6.1. VERIFICATION OF PROCEDURES
Procedures listed in Table II with status symbols "U" or "P"

have not been fully tried and tested in all particulars sufficient
to verify that they are suitable and without fault for the
intended purpose. Steps should be taken to evaluate them; to
demonstrate their worth and/or shortcomings.
6.2. PARAMETERS NOT COVERED
The procedures contained in Section 4.0. cover a majority of

the receiver parameters that are most commonly measured. However,
procedures have not been worked out for other parameters that
may be significant in certain applications. Such procedures should
be developed as necessary. These parameters include the following:
a. Incidental FM
b. Phase distortion, both RF and AF
c. Reciprocal mixing
d. Response to internally generated spurious signals
("birdies")
e. Sweep- tuning linearity
f. AFC capture bandwidth
g. Noise limiter efficiency
h. Detector linearity
i. Detector efficiency
j. Diversity transfer sensitivity
k. Overload protection threshold
1. Power supply transient recovery
m. Tuning backlash, mechanical and/or electrical
435
. .
6.3. IMPROVED PROCEDURES
Certain of the procedures listed in Table II are either

completely inadequate for the intended purpose (e.g., 4.5.3.,
4.5.4., and 4.6.2.) or can be improved upon by applying newly
developed principles or techniques. These improvements will
require R&D
effort on the part of qualified metrologists and ,
should be carried out according to the need. Parameters for

which present procedures are inadequate or which warrant
improvement include the following:
a Radiated interference susceptibility

b. Radiated emission
c Dynamic range
d. Spurious response attenuation
e Cross modulation
f Intermodulation distortion
g- Impulse bandwidth
h. Conducted interference susceptibility
i Time delay
j • Selectance
Radiated susceptibility and emission measurements are hamstrung

by the lack of effective techniques for measuring in the near field
and in shielded enclosures. New probes and radically new enclosure
designs are needed by many agencies for a wide variety of purposes.
Measurement techniques for parameters involving receiver

nonlinearities (cross modulation, intermodulation, etc.) give
marginal results because of nonlinearities and distortion products
in the test equipment itself. Alternate techniques might be
possible; for example, the noise power ratio (NPR) technique shows
promise for measuring intermodulation distortion
436
. .
Measurements requiring large amounts of time, such as

searching for intermodulation products or spurious responses,
or which require large amounts of data, such as selectance or
AGC leveling effect, can benefit from elementary automation
techniques
The measurement of receiver impulse response, and related

parameters such as impulse bandwidth and phase distortion, are
hampered by inadequate definitions and standards for pulse
quantities A time-domain description of receiver behavior may
.
have some advantages over the traditional frequency-domain

description
Finally, conducted susceptibility and emission measurements

are often meaningless because of line impedance variations and
uncertainties Improved insertion and line impedance network
.
designs are needed, or alternate techniques must be developed.
437
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Barghausen, A. F. , et al., "Equipment Characteristics

and Their Relation to System Performance for Tropospheric
Communication Circuits," NBS Tech. Note 103, January 1963.
Crow, E. L. , Davis, F. A., and Maxfield, M. W. , Statistics

Manual, Dover Publications, New York, 1960.
Florman, E. F., and Tary, J. J., "Required Signal-To-Noise

Ratios, RF Signal Power, and Bandwidth For Multichannel
Radio Communications Systems," NBS Tech. Note 100, January
1962 .
Henney, K. , Radio Engineering Handbook, Fifth Edition,

McGraw-Hill, New York 19 59.
Landee, R. W. , Davis, D. C, and Albrecht, A. P., Electronic

Designers' Handbook , McGraw-Hill, New York 1957.
Langford-Smith , F. , Radiotron Designer's Handbook , Fourth

Edition, RCA Electronic Components, New Jersey, 1953.
Oliver, B. M. , and Cage, J. M. , Electronic Measurements And

Instrumentation , McGraw-Hill, New York, 19 71.
Scroggie, M. G. , Radio and Electronic Laboratory Handbook ,
Iliffe Books, Ltd., London, 1961.
Sosin, B. M. , "H.F. Communication Receiver Performance

Requirements and Realization," Radio and Electronic
Engineer, Vol. 41, July, 1971, pp. 321-329.
438
[10] Sucher, M. , and Fox, J., Handbook of Microwave Measurements ,
Vol. Ill, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1963.
[11] Terman, F. E., and Pettit, J. M. , Electronic Measurements ,
Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1952.
[12] Thomas, H. E., Handbook for Electronic Engineers and

Technicians, Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 1965.
[13] Willis, D. R. , "Testing FM Mobile Radio Transceivers,"

Marconi Instriamentation , Vol. 12, No. 8A, 1970, pp. 150-156 .
[14] Wind, M. , Handbook of Electronic Measurements , Vol. II,

Edwards Brothers, Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan, 1956.
[15] Wind, M. , and Rapaport, H. , Handbook of Microwave

Measurements , Vol. I & II, Edwards Brothers, Inc., Ann
Arbor, Michigan, 19 54.
[16] Youden, W. J., Experimentation and Measurement , Scholastic

Book Services, New York, 1962,
[17] Minimum Standard for Test Conditions Common to FM or PM

Land-Mobile Communications Equipment 25-470 MHz, EIA
RS-388, January 1971.
[18] Reference Data for Radio Engineers , Fifth Edition,

Howard W. Sams & Co., Inc., 196 8.
439
,
NBS-114A (REV. 7-73)
U.S. DEPT. OF COMM. 1. PUBLICATION OR REPORT NO. 2. Gov't Accession 3. Recipient's Accession No.
BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA No.
SHEET NBSIR 73-333
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE 5. Publication Date
xcoL r c u u. 1 c o ri.ciiiu. uu UK lo r ou.r v ciiiaric. c x\t:Ccivcxb Octobe r 1973

Below 100 MHz 6. Performing Organization Code
7. AUTHOR(S) 8. Performing Organ. Report No.

M. G. Arthur
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS 10. Project/Task/Work Unit No.
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS Boulder Labs. 2729103

,
DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 11. Contract/Grant No.
Boulder, CO 80302 MIPR Number

ASA 101-72
12. Sponsoring Organization Name and Complete Address (Street, City, State, ZIP) 13. Type of Report & Period
Covered
U. S. Array Security Agency
Final
-u- " Fort Huachuca, Arizona
14. Sponsoring Agency Code
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
16. ABSTRACT (A 200-word or less factual summary of most signiticant information. If document includes a significant
bibliography or literature survey, mention it here.)
This handbook contains test raethods and procedures for radio receivers of
advanced design that operate in the frequency range belovi^ 100 MHz. Sixty-
one methods are given for testing forty receiver characteristics such as
sensitivity, selectivity, gain, interference susceptibility, audio charac ter is tic s
power supply characteristics, and others. Each receiver characteristic is
defined. For each method, the following information is given: (a) test
equipment required, (b) step by step procedure, (c) data required, and
(d) measurement error computation. The handbook also includes a general
discussion of standard test conditions, suitable test equipment, and measure-
ment errors.
17. KEY WORDS fsix to twelve entries; alphabetical order; capitalize only the first letter of the first key word unless a proper
name; separated by semicolons)
Electronic measurements; electronic test equipment; measurement errors;
radio receivers; receiver characteristics; receiver testing.
18. AVAILABILITY Unlimited 19. SECURITY CLASS 21. NO. OF PAGES

(THIS REPORT)
1
X '
For Official Distribution. Do Not Release to NTIS
UNCLASSIFIED
1
' Order From Sup. of Doc, U.S. Government Printing Office 20. SECURITY CLASS 22. Price
Washington. D.C. 20402. SD Cat. No. CU (THIS PAGE)
1
! Order From National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
Springfield, Virginia 22151 UNCLASSIFIED
USCOMM-DC 29042-P74
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1 974 _ 784-576 / 1262 REGION NO.

Nbsir73 333

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nbsir73 333

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nbsir73 333

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NBSIR 73-333 (K)

TEST PROCEDURES HANDBOOK FOR

TEST PROCEDURES HANDBOOK FOR

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, Frederick B. Dent, Secretary

NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS, Richard W Roberts Director

1.2. SCOPE AND LIMITATIONS 1

1.3. SOURCES OF INFORMATION 2

2.0 SURVEILLANCE RECEIVERS 6

2.1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS 6

2.2. CRITERIA FOR TEST AND CALIBRATION 7

2.3. SPECIFICATIONS OF TYPICAL RECEIVERS 7

3.0. TEST METHODS AND PROCEDURES 11

3.3.1. TYPES OF ERRORS 22

3.3.2. ORIGINS OF ERRORS 22

3.3.3. ERROR EQUATION 22

4.3.3. AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL 115

4.1.1. Test Set-Up for Gain Limited Sensitivity .... 28

4.1.2. Test Set-Up for 6 dB SN/N Sensitivity 34

4.1.3. Test Set-Up for 12 dB SN/N Sensitivity (AM). . . 42

4.1.4. Test Set-Up for Quieting Sensitivity 48

4.1.5. Test Set-Up for 12 dB SINAD Sensitivity (FM) . . 56

4.1.6.1. Test Set-Up for Noise Factor, ANFM Method ... 63

4.1.6.2. Test Set-Up for Noise Factor, Y-Factor/Power

4.1.6.3. Test Set-Up for Noise Factor, Y-Factor/Attenuator

4.1.6.4. Test Set-Up for Noise Factor, 3 dB Method ... 81

4.2. Test Set-Up for Signal- to-Noise Ratio 86

4.3.1. Test Set-Up for Power Gain 92

4.3.2.1. Test Set-Up for Dynamic Range, MGC 99

4.3.2.2. Test Set-Up for Dynamic Range, AGC 109

4.3.3.1. Test Set-Up for Automatic Gain Control; Gain

4.3.3.2. Test Set-Up for Automatic Gain Control; Leveling

4.3.3.3. Test Set-Up for Automatic Gain Control; Time

4.4.1.1. Test Set-Up for Selectance, Point-by-Point

4.4.1.2. Test Set-Up for Selectance, Point-by-Point

4.4.1.3. Test Set-Up for Selectance, Swept Frequency

4.4.2.1. Test Set-Up for Bandwidth, Generator Method . . 155

4.4.2.2. Test Set-Up for Bandwidth, Swept-Frequency

4.4.3. Test Set-Up for Shape Factor 165

4.4.4. Test Set-Up for Modulation Acceptance Bandwidth 173

4.4.5.1. Test Set-Up for Spurious Response Attenu-

4.4.5.2. Test Set-Up for Spurious Response Attenu-

4.4.6. Test Set-Up for Noise Bandwidth 192

4.4.7. Test Set-Up for Desensitization 197

4.4.8. Test Set-Up for Cross Modulation 205

4.4.9. Test Set-Up for Adjacent Channel Selectivity . . 214

4.4.10.1. Test Set-Up for Intermodulation Distortion,

4.4.10.2. Test Set-Up for Intermodulation Distortion,

4.4.10.3. Test Set-Up for Intermodulation Distortion,

4.4.10.4. Test Set-Up for Intermodulation Distortion,

4.4.11.1. Test Set-Up for Impulse Bandwidths 252

4.4.11.2. Impulse Response Pattern 255

4.5.1. Test Set-Up for Conducted Interference

4.5.2. Test Set-Up for Conducted Interference

4.5.3. Test Set-Up for Radiated Interference

4.5.4. Test Set-Up for Radiated Interference

4.6.1. Test Set-Up for Conducted Emission 290

4.6.2. Test Set-Up for Radiated Emission 297

4.7. Test Set-Up for Time Delay 300

4.8. Test Set-Up for Frequency Stability 311